The 2025 TV Shootout went down over the weekend, and the results are shocking: yes, the Sony Bravia 8 II won the overall competition and my personal award for silliest name, but the LG G5 came in last place by a huge margin. I was one of the judges, and I think I have a sense of what’s going on.
If you’re not familiar, the TV Shootout is an annual event hosted by Value Electronics, a boutique and high-end home theater store started by Robert and Wendy Zohn in 1998. They’ve been holding the event for 21 years now, and Robert proudly begins the occasion by holding up his framed registered trademarks for “TV Shootout” and “King of TV,” which is the title bestowed on the winner. I’ve been following the results for years, so it was a real thrill when Robert asked me to judge last year and equally exciting when he asked me back again this year.
(As Vergecast and Decoder listeners know, I’m out on parental leave for a few months, but Value Electronics is 15 minutes away from my house and staring at TVs in a dark room for several hours with other display nerds is my personal heaven, so I made a tiny exception.)
The event is pretty straightforward: the flagship 65-inch OLED TVs from Sony, LG, Panasonic, and Samsung were each professionally calibrated as closely as possible to reference standards by Dwayne Davis, a professional ISF calibrator familiar to AV forum nerds as D-Nice. The TVs (and MSRP) this year were:
Robert had asked many more manufacturers to participate, and most declined, knowing they could not compete. He also excluded mini LED TVs this year after they didn’t stack up to the OLEDs last year; he plans to have a separate shootout for those later.
The Shootout judges were all professional display experts who work in and around the film industry. Many of them have been judging the Shootout for years now. They were:
The rest of the room was filled with engineers and marketing folks from Sony, LG, and Samsung, several YouTubers, and various other display nerds, all paying close attention to the judging and the differences between the displays.
The judges were asked to objectively evaluate how closely the images on each set matched a pair of $43,000 Sony BVM-HX3110 professional reference monitors across a number of categories in a very dark room, using both test patterns and real content delivered from a Panasonic Blu-ray player, a Kaleidescape streaming box, and an Apple TV, all switched by an AVPro Edge 8×8 HDMI matrix and delivered over Bullet Train optical HDMI cables.
The closer the image was to those BVM reference displays, the higher the score, and the further from the reference, the lower the score. There were categories in which some TVs might have looked subjectively better than the reference displays, particularly in dark scenes where all the TVs tended to boost shadow detail to be more visible. But the judges were instructed to give lower scores for deviating from the reference in either direction. We were also instructed not to compare the TVs to one another, only to the reference monitors.
It was only the final category, “bright room out of the box,” that was totally subjective, and in which we were allowed to compare the TVs to each other. As the name suggests, the shades were opened in the room, and the TVs were set to uncalibrated filmmaker modes with energy-saving features turned off. More on this in a moment.
As ever, this means the Shootout ultimately delivers a very specific kind of winner: the TV that can be most closely calibrated to match an expensive professional reference display when viewed in a dark room. We didn’t look at anything else at all: not gaming features, number of HDMI inputs, operating systems, or even Dolby Vision support (which the Samsung does not have). This whole thing was about the limits of picture quality and picture quality alone. There are a lot of reasons you might pick any of these TVs that have nothing to do with how closely they can be calibrated to match a reference display, but that’s not what the Shootout is about.
It’s a big upgrade year for OLED TVs: Panasonic is back in the US market with the Z95B, and there are new panel technologies in the mix. LG and Panasonic are using tandem OLED panels for the first time, while Sony and Samsung are using new, brighter QD-OLED panels. (You can pretty easily surmise that Samsung is providing the QD-OLEDs and LG is behind the tandems, but none of the manufacturers will confirm anything.)
The underlying commonality of the panels means the Shootout really stresses the image processing differences between the manufacturers, and the results were fascinating. Panasonic had an incredibly strong showing, coming in first on the HDR tests and third overall by only a hair. Sony won the King of TV title for the seventh year in a row, which will do nothing to quell critics who say that measuring how close everything can come to a Sony reference display means Sony will always win. But the Samsung was a very close second, and to my eye, it only really fell behind because Samsung cannot help itself when it comes to colors — everything was generally a little more saturated and vibrant than the reference display.
Manufacturer | Contrast / Grayscale | Color | Processing | Bright Living Room | Overall Average |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
LG OLED65G5WUA | 3.69 | 3.84 | 3.31 | 4.06 | 3.68 |
Panasonic TV65Z95BP | 3.84 | 3.97 | 3.78 | 4.25 | 3.92 |
Samsung QN65S95FAFXZA | 4.38 | 3.88 | 3.66 | 4.19 | 4.00 |
Sony K-65XR80M2 | 4.41 | 3.84 | 4.22 | 4.19 | 4.16 |
Manufacturer | Dynamic Range / EOTF Accuracy | Color | Processing | Bright Living Room | Overall Average |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
LG OLED65G5WUA | 3.41 | 2.84 | 3.34 | 3.94 | 3.30 |
Panasonic TV65Z95BP | 4.03 | 4.00 | 3.97 | 3.88 | 3.98 |
Samsung QN65S95FAFXZA | 3.88 | 4.13 | 3.72 | 4.38 | 3.97 |
Sony K-65XR80M2 | 3.94 | 4.03 | 3.53 | 4.19 | 3.88 |
The shocker was the dismal showing by the LG G5, a hotly anticipated set because of that new tandem OLED panel. There’s no other way to say it: the G5 basically failed several of the tests, showing the wrong colors on some of the linearity test patterns, big posterization artifacts in dark scenes, a slight green cast that kept reappearing, and an overall tendency to push color and brightness in dark scenes in ways that did not require display nerds to see. The LG made Sansa Stark look like she had a blocky red rash during a particularly dim Game of Thrones scene that the Sony and Samsung handled nearly perfectly. “There are lots of problems with the LG this year,” said judge Cecil Meade. I heard other judges say, “Have you seen what the LG is doing?” more than once. Indeed, the G5 was so far off on some of the test patterns that Dwayne reminded the judges that the lowest possible score was 1, not 0. This is generally a bad sign.
If I had to explain why the LG did so poorly while the Panasonic did so well using the same panel, I’d put it down to confidence, bordering on cockiness. The test patterns tended to reveal that Panasonic’s image processing is strictly by the book — the new kid in school playing exactly by the rules, while the other manufacturers have all learned where they want to push things or make their own choices.
A simple example is HDR detail: the Panasonic dutifully accepts the metadata of the HDR content it’s presented and doesn’t display any detail beyond the listed brightness while all the other manufacturers have learned HDR metadata is often inaccurate, so they read the content directly to figure out how best to display it, which often resulted in additional detail being shown. This might result in a lower technical Shootout score, since it’s a deviation from the strict reference image, but TV makers are all doing it because they’ve learned that consumers will reliably complain about losing detail in the highlights and shadows, not about having too much.
These little tricks and tactics are both the result of experience building these displays and what feels like obvious attempts to differentiate in the market. Sony prides itself on reference-level restraint, and it tends to get that result, while Samsung uses the same panel to deliver punched-up Samsung-style colors. And I would say, based on LG’s third-place showing in the Shootout last year, that LG has learned a vivid, contrast-y OLED look sells way more TVs than the ability to calibrate closely to a reference display.
Everything came to a head in the “bright room out of box” test, which was fairly controversial in the room. It’s a totally subjective test with no real standard to measure against, and all the manufacturers spend almost all their engineering time making sure they look great this way because, well, most people put their TVs in a bright room and never change the settings. There’s no way to really rate TVs of this caliber against each other on this test — it really comes down to personal preference. “They’re all fives — they’re all bright, they’re all colorful. What else is there to say?” said David Mackenzie, a judge on the panel who also helped author the UHD specifications. You can see it in the scores, where the LG managed to pull itself back into contention and the saturated colors of the Samsung pushed it into a commanding lead in the HDR test. I would go so far as to argue the bright room scores are important but should be taken out of the averages that determine the winners, because they’re essentially a wild card.
And it’s true: the fine differences between these sets take a dark room and a lot of time and calibration to see. Anyone just putting one on the wall will undoubtedly be happy with their purchase, especially if you factor things like HDMI ports and Dolby Vision into your decision. I have both Sony and LG OLED TVs that reliably wow everyone who looks at them, and a lot of people love the contrast-y LG OLED look — and LG’s cheaper price tags.
But if you’re chasing reference-level image perfection, it’s another year for Sony, while it feels like LG has all but abandoned this particular game. And I’d guess Panasonic is going to put up an even bigger fight next time around.
]]>It’s summertime, which means it’s time for our annual grilling episode. In past years, we’ve talked to the leaders of Big Green Egg, Traeger, and Blackstone, and it’s always fascinating how those companies have the same kinds of problems and ideas as any of the tech companies we have on the show.
In fact, it’s funny — in what can only be described as a perfectly Decoder situation, I really wanted to have Blackstone CEO Roger Dahle back on the show this year because his griddle company is such a success that he’s in the process of buying Weber, the biggest name in the space. But he’s stuck in antitrust review so he couldn’t come on the show. Grilling episodes, man — they’re the best.
Anyhow, all that means is that I finally had the opportunity to talk to SharkNinja CEO Mark Barrocas. We’ve wanted to have SharkNinja on the show for years now, mostly because it has the best name of any company that we’ve ever had on Decoder. The name perfectly describes the company’s structure: there’s Shark, and there’s Ninja. And, just in time for our grilling episode, the Ninja division of Mark’s business launched its first grill, the FlexFlame, earlier this year.
Listen to Decoder, a show hosted by The Verge’s Nilay Patel about big ideas — and other problems. Subscribe here!
But, as you’ll hear Mark and I really get into, SharkNinja is really a product design company more than anything else. It has what you could only describe as a relentless approach to product development — SharkNinja launches 25 new products a year, across dozens of categories, in countries around the world. So, while we do spend a lot of time talking about the decision to launch the FlexFlame and what the business of grilling looks like for SharkNinja, you’ll also hear Mark and I talk a lot about the company’s broader philosophy around product development across all of its different categories.
A lot of that philosophy, which was developed in the late 2000s for markets like vacuum cleaners and blenders, is now being applied to everything from slushy machines and pizza ovens to LED face masks. You’ll hear Mark explain that SharkNinja has a product engineering and design team of more than 1,300 people globally, dedicated to figuring out new twists on household staples. It’s also remarkable how many of the products are built around fan technology, which comes up a few times in this conversation.
In fact, a key component of the FlexFlame grill is a fan that lets it do a lot of different things. But the grill industry, as you might know, is a fiercely competitive market with a lot of brand loyalty, and product features alone might not be enough. I can’t tell you how many furious reader comments and emails we received when the CEO of Big Green Egg took a shot at Weber on last year’s grill episode. People love their grills, and they will fiercely defend them.
So I really wanted to ask Mark how his style of product development worked in the context of gas grills — and whether he’s envisioning Ninja’s outdoor grilling products as premium devices you keep for a long time or as ones that might rust and get replaced after a few years as you would an iPhone.
Mark and I also spent a good deal of time at the end talking about marketing. SharkNinja spends more than $700 million a year on advertising, a great deal of which now goes to product placement and content creators on Instagram and TikTok. You’ll hear Mark recount his time selling products on television infomercials in the 2000s and how that’s now evolved into having his appliances become viral sensations online.
Mark has a lot of thoughts about the state of the creator economy, which is already in the process of getting totally upended by cheap and limitless AI video, and whether he sees it teetering on the edge of a crash that could transform how he markets and sells his most popular products.
This episode is a real ride — Mark’s infomercials background really comes through at times, and I think you can tell that I found myself just trying to hang on throughout this one.
Okay: SharkNinja CEO Mark Barrocas. Here we go.
This interview has been lightly edited for length and clarity.
Mark Barrocas, you’re the CEO of SharkNinja. Welcome to Decoder.
Thanks so much for having me.
I am really excited to talk to you. I’m fascinated by SharkNinja as a company. It’s been around for a long time, but you’re having a bit of a renaissance lately. On top of that, this is our annual summer grill episode, and you guys just launched a new line of grills. So it’s perfect timing. Couldn’t be happier about it.
Great, really happy to be here.
Let’s talk about SharkNinja as a company to set the stage a bit. I think a lot of people know Shark, and a lot of people know Ninja. You’ve started marketing the main company a little bit more recently. Tell me about this company. Why have the two brands? How is it structured? How do you think about SharkNinja as a company?
As you said, the business behind these two great brands is SharkNinja. People know the Shark brand. We built Shark into an over $3 billion [a year] global business. We have the Ninja brand, which is over a $3 billion [a year] global business. Now, we’re actively marketing the SharkNinja business behind these two great brands, and trying to explain to consumers that we’re problem solvers. That’s what our business is all about. We find problems that others don’t see, and we solve problems that others can’t.
We can get more into how we do that and why that’s unique to SharkNinja. We’re in 37 product categories. We sell in 27 countries around the world to everyone, from a high school kid doing a TikTok or an Instagram video about our products all the way up to a 60-year-old guy who’s focused on outdoor grilling or smoking. So, we’ve got a big demographic base and big socioeconomic group of consumers.
The idea that you’re going to market the central company, SharkNinja, as problem solvers comes up. There are lots of big household brands that exist in that space. OXO is very famous for this In the kitchen, where everything is somewhat uniquely designed, a little bit different. It’s not a direct competitor to you, but the marketing there feels familiar. This is going to be the highest bit of design product that you can get. There are lots of others that play the same game. Is that what you’re thinking about? Do you want people to think of you as a design company or is it something else?
No. We want people to think of us as a consumer problem-solving company. You can focus on consumer products and look at it through a technology lens. You can say, “Hey, I have this core technology, and I’m going to take it and apply it to two or three or four different categories of products that might be applicable.”
Our core technology is consumer problem-solving. We’ve got a big team of ethnographic, consumer insights researchers. We’re mining consumer data, online reviews, social media content, and comments. We’re in hundreds of consumer homes around the world every year. We’re in restaurants. We’re in commercial environments looking at how people clean or cook there.
We’re trying to find either a problem that a consumer has that they may not even know that they have — and we can talk about examples of that — or we’re trying to find things that the consumer is doing outside of the home that they’re not doing inside of the home. Ultimately, I think those two different things become the germs of innovation and ideas that we then have our 1,300 engineers around the globe focus on. And you say, “Well, hold on, vacuum cleaners have been around for 100 years. Hasn’t every problem been solved?”
I’ll give you a great anecdote. We went into 100 consumer homes, and we watched consumers vacuum. During the cleaning session, about eight or 10 of those turned over the vacuum, took a knife or a scissor, sliced the hair off the brush roll, pulled the hair off, threw it in the garbage, and finished their cleaning session. At the end of the cleaning session, we said to them, “Is there anything you do to change your vacuum cleaner?” They said, “No, it works great.” We said, “Well, hold on a minute. How about that time when you turned it over and you nearly cut your hand and you sliced it?” They started apologizing for the product. They started saying, “Well, I have two daughters with long hair. I have three dogs.”
A consumer works around the problems of the product. Well, for us, that becomes an idea. So, we go back to our engineers, and we say, “Can we develop a vacuum brush roll that doesn’t wrap hair?” Eighteen months later, we came out with Shark’s Self-cleaning Brushroll, and it became the number one selling vacuum cleaner in the United States.
That’s just a little example. We do that in category after category after category, which is why we’re not limited to two or three or four categories. We’re in 37 different product categories in and outside the home.
There’s a lot there that I want to unpack. You’re talking about a lot of upfront investment in product development. Many of your competitors don’t do that. They really do take core technology and reapply it in different categories. Many of your competitors are based in China. They’re selling on Amazon, and they’re selling clones of your products. They don’t have to front that investment, and they can keep their costs low.
How do you think about that dynamic? What you’re describing requires you to constantly front the cost of innovation that will almost certainly get copied at higher rates across the board.
SharkNinja has two main competitive advantages. One is disruptive consumer innovation. We spend 7 percent of our sales on R&D and innovation in an industry where competitors spend 1 percent of sales or less on innovation. We bring 25 new, ground-up products to market a year. I’m not talking about a new product as a new color or button. These are ground-up, brand new products across so many different product categories.
We enter into at least two new product categories that we’ve never been in before every year. Before last year, we were never in the skincare business. We were never in the outdoor cooler business. Last year, we went into four new product categories. We made an LED, infrared, cryo face mask, which was our first FDA-approved medical device. We launched a slushy machine that went viral on social media. We made our first outdoor pizza oven. You can’t think of more diverse categories. The common stream through all of those is that they all solve a consumer problem.
I think this is a great time for the Decoder questions. Usually, we talk about some controversy at the top, but you’re describing something that’s so interesting that I think the structure will actually help explain a lot. How is SharkNinja structured? How many people do you have, and how is it organized?
We’ve got nearly 4,000 people around the globe. From a structure standpoint, we have an executive management team that is half homegrown, with people who have been with me for 17 years. That’s rounded out with other folks who have joined the organization and have been able to bring scale or global experience into their areas, like product development, engineering, sales, and marketing.
Those folks have been with me a long time. We’ve really helped build the SharkNinja secret sauce together. We’ve rounded that out with great talent from other great companies and with other great experiences to build a really strong management team.
How is that organized? Do you have a Shark division and a Ninja division? Is it all one company? How’s that expressed?
From a functional standpoint, the administrative roles are all corporate SharkNinja. There’s a corporate CEO, a corporate general counsel, a corporate COO, and a corporate people and culture leader. When you start to get into the individual teams, we break it up. There’s Shark Home, which involves cleaning, home environment products, fans, and air purifiers. We have Shark Beauty business, which is haircare and skincare. Then we have the Ninja business, which is everything that we do within Ninja. So, that’s how we break down the business. There are two brands, but inside of those two brands is Shark Home, Shark Beauty, and Ninja.
If I look at that broadly and I just look at your competitive set, Shark and Dyson have always been back and forth. There’s been some lawsuits, some patent disputes. Some of those have settled over time. There’s a lot there.
To your point, Dyson invented fan technology and it tried to express it across a number of different products that led them into beauty. It got into hairdryers, then expanded into the rest of the beauty products, and it’s done well. How are you thinking about Shark? You started with your core technology, you ended up at beauty, and now you’re going to do the rest of it?
If I go back 17 years, we were a small business. We were a $150 million [a year] business. I’d love to say that there was a grand plan of how to become a $6 billion global business without acquiring a dollar of revenue.
Could you tell me? That would be great.
To be honest with you, we just wanted to make great products that consumers loved. If I go back to 2008, what we realized was that the consumer was getting more and more power in terms of being educated before they made a purchase.
In 2008, there was a thing called Consumer Reports. You opened up Consumer Reports and it told you the eight vacuum cleaners to buy. If your vacuum cleaner wasn’t listed in there, you were going to have a really hard time gaining awareness. What my partner and I at the time realized was that consumer online reviews would be the great equalizer. You hear that today and say, “Well, what great equalizer is that?” Well, back then, people often bought from one brand or based on an expert recommendation. What started to happen was consumers started going online and started writing honest reviews about their experiences with products.
Soon, consumers weren’t going to open up Consumer Reports before they would go out and make a purchase. They were going to go online and look at 10 million of their closest friends to figure out which vacuum cleaner or blender to buy. And they were going to get honest opinions. That is one of the major drivers of our business. If I go back 15 years, we built our business one five-star review at a time. So, if you had a great experience with a Shark vacuum, you say, “Hey, I might try Shark’s air purifiers that just came out,” or, “They got into haircare? I might try their haircare products.”
It’s interesting. What we look at is what gives us the right to be in the category. The right to be in the category is not because you have a brand that you can just put your name on because you see a sales opportunity. What are we bringing to the consumer that they can’t get anywhere else? What’s an unmet need that the consumer has? We set a very high bar on that within the company. There have been categories that we worked on for 10 years and never brought a product to market because, ultimately, we came to the conclusion that the consumer and world don’t need us. So, being anchored on this beacon and asking what gives us the right to be in the category has led us very methodically to the next opportunity and the next opportunity and the next opportunity.
What’s one that you’ve been rejecting for 10 years?
I loved the power tools business. I think the Shark brand can translate into power tools. We used to think of ourselves as in the home. We’re making a lot of products now for outside the home. I thought power tools were a great opportunity. We’ve tried it three, four… Ultimately, we got to the place and said, “You know what? We’re not bringing anything that’s game-changing or solving a massive problem that somebody else isn’t solving.” And we decided to go back to the drawing board.
I will tell you also that there are categories that we tried for eight years, and we eventually cracked the code. An example of that is the carpet extraction and stain cleaner category. We became the number one selling vacuum brand in the United States in 2014. Ever since, retailers and consumers would say, “Why aren’t you getting into the carpet cleaning business? That seems so logical from a brand extension standpoint.” The honest answer was that we never came up with something that was great.
We finally cracked the code on that about two and a half years ago with a product called the Shark CarpetXpert. It cleans carpets better than anything else on the market. It’s much more lightweight, much easier to use. It does it with an attachment called the Stainstriker. In a short period of time, we gained over 20 percent market share in that category.
This shows us that just because we might bang our head against the wall a couple of times doesn’t mean we won’t eventually crack the code. We may figure it out. When we do figure it out, the innovation really connects with the other competitive mode of the business, which is creating viral demand for our products. We spend 11 percent of sales on advertising in an industry that spends very little on advertising. So, you’ve got a disruptive product that solves a consumer problem, and you’re able to go out and talk about it on things like social media, experiential events, and TV. When those things come together and you get it right, it really connects with the consumer. Not just in the United States but globally.
That’s a really fascinating piece of the SharkNinja story, and I think it tells a bigger story about the advertising market, particularly on the internet, than anyone really is giving credit to you. But I want to stay in corporate structure for one more second. So you’ve got Shark Home, Shark Beauty, and Ninja. Ninja feels like kitchen products?
Kitchen and outdoor. We do outdoor cooking, we do outdoor coolers. Yeah, kitchen and outdoors.
At the company, you’ve got 1,300 engineers. Are they split between divisions? Do you have central engineering? Do they compete for resources? How does that work?
We have 1,300 engineers today around the globe. They’re based in Boston, London, and Asia. There are certain functions within the company, like electrical engineering, that might go across different categories because they’re subject matter experts. But it’s not just the number of engineers that we have. It’s the competency of those engineers. We’ve got mechanical engineers, electrical engineers, mechatronics, app IoT, and software engineers.
I think you’d be really surprised if you went inside one of our products. There’s an enormous amount of technology in a product that retails for $199. If I went back seven or eight years, most of it would be mechanical engineering. Today, the software team and the electronics team, together with mechanical engineering, have allowed us to bring so much more functionality to the product, allowing the consumer to have so much versatility with it than they ever were able to before.
So, when the Ninja team says they’ve got an idea for a gas grill and they need a bunch of software engineers to work on the app to run the FlexFlame system, and those same engineers are being pulled towards the next project, how do you divvy up those resources?
It’s a challenge, But here’s what’s super exciting about it. If you’re an engineer and you work at a company that has one product category that you sell, eventually after three or five years, you get to the point where you say, “Look, I’ve gotten tired. If I want to go to another opportunity or I want to work on something else, I have to find a job in another company.” At SharkNinja, you can find your next job within SharkNinja. You’ve been working on vacuum cleaners for three years. You want to try something different? How about air fryers? How about outdoor cooking? How about fans? How about robots? How about hairdryers or skincare?
I think the cross pollination of engineers is so powerful for us. Our ability to to put out an intercompany message that says, “Does anyone have experience in LED lights? Does anyone have experience in airflow technology?” To be able to see the number of experts we have internally is incredible. If you’re a company, you might have to go outside and find a whole lot of subject matter experts. We have a whole lot of subject matter experts inside that are red teaming each other’s products.
The joke I’m always making on Decoder is that if you tell me your company’s structure, I can tell you 80 percent of its problems. You’re describing two big divisions, both of which are growing and aggressively launching new products. There are some subdivisions on the inside. I’m guessing if the Ninja team steals a bunch of LED lighting engineers from the Shark team, they’re not going to be happy about that. That’s you. You’ve got to mediate that dynamic. How do you mediate those resources? How do you allocate them?
I think a lot of it comes down to the needs of the product. We really don’t look at it rigidly by if it’s a Shark product or Ninja product. We start with a product pipeline of ideas, which might have 65 ideas that we start with. Over time, we whittle that down. We might put something into a prototype, get it into a consumer’s home. We thought it was a great idea, but the consumer says they’re not interested so we throw it away.
We might just put something on packaging. We might not even put it into a prototype. We might show them a box front and say, “Hey, does this get you excited?” We might look at something and say, “It’s great, but it’s too expensive and we don’t think it’s commercially viable.” Maybe it’s too early for the consumer. Maybe there’s a problem, but the consumer doesn’t even know yet that it’s a problem.
I’ll give you an example. They just mandated composting in New York City. It’s very interesting. A New York apartment is going to have to sit there with their food scraps, putting them into this little plastic bin and this little bag. They’re going to have to wait seven days. What do you think happens to that bag on day four or five? It doesn’t smell great. So, we had some young engineers that were super passionate about solving that problem. The challenge with it though is that it’s not in enough municipalities. The consumer hasn’t engaged with it enough to realize what the problems are. So it may be something incredible but it’s two years too early.
So, we’ll put that in the parking lot, and we’ll say, “Let’s revisit that when it comes to the next product innovation cycle.” We really do look at it at the product level and not at the brand or company level. I think that’s what helps us assess how to divvy up resources.
The other thing I would say is that we use a tremendous amount of outside experts. This is a company where it does not have to be invented here. We are looking for the best and brightest people to help us solve consumer problems. In any given month, we could be working with as many as 50 outside subject-matter experts. They could be on things as little as gear systems or troubleshooting a particular heater that we might have.
That’s something that I don’t want to underestimate because at a lot of engineering companies, engineers feel like, “Hold on, you hired me to solve it, so I have to solve it.” We’re sitting here saying, “At the end of the day, we want the consumer to open up the box and enjoy the product.” The consumer doesn’t care whether you made 100 percent of the product internally or whether you brought in five subject matter experts to help. We do a really incredible job of getting the best and brightest people to help us solve these problems.
That really comes down to how you think about investing in the core technologies. I’ll just stick with Shark and the vacuum cleaners, blow dryers, and air purifiers. At the core of that technology are high-efficiency small motors. They can move a lot of air. You can express that in multiple kinds of products. That’s a very competitive segment. That’s the patent lawsuits. It’s deeply competitive.
You can go buy that core technology. Once you’ve developed it, the goal is to ramp it over time and take margin out of all that upfront cost. But you’re launching into so many new categories. You’re going out to buy lots and lots of new core technologies from 50 different subject matter experts. How do you think about managing those life cycles? Where do you think about spending the money on new technologies that will last for a long time and let you take margin out and where do you think the technology is mature, and what you need to do is actually expand the category?
It’s interesting. I’ll go back to the example that you gave on vacuum cleaners because I think that’s a good one. We have patented a no-loss suction vacuum technology, so the consumer can pick up whatever they want and won’t lose any appreciable level of suction over the life of the product. But as you start identifying the next consumer problem, you start having to then build evolutionary or add-on technologies.
I want to give you some examples that I think you might find interesting. We had great no-loss suction technology when we developed our first vacuum cleaner, which was called the Shark Navigator, We cleaned carpets better than our competition, and we did it at a fraction of the price. Those were the core things. In 2009, we found that the American consumer was really interested in cleaning carpets. That was the proxy of a great vacuum cleaner.
In 2010, we said, “Okay, what’s the next problem for us to solve?” We went into consumers’ homes, we watched them vacuum. In the homes that had stairs or multi-level homes, they would plug the vacuum in, pull the hose out, and clean the first three steps of the stairs. They would then unplug the vacuum, walk upstairs, plug it in, and clean the top three steps. The middle three steps would never get clean because the hose was never able to reach that far. So, we looked at that and we said, “Why is the vacuum tethered to this base on the ground? What if you could lift it away, walk around with the vacuum cleaner, and have 30 feet of travel with the cord?” That product was called the Shark Navigator Lift-Away. It’s still the number-one selling vacuum cleaner in the United States. We solved the problem by having vacuums that not only cleaned on the floor but cleaned above the floor as well.
Now you might say, “Okay, hasn’t everything been developed?” Well, three years later, we want to know what’s the next problem. The next problem is cleaning under furniture. You don’t want to move the furniture. How do you clean under a bed? Imagine what under a bed looks like when you haven’t cleaned it for two years. So we developed something called Powered Lift-Away. You took the canister off the vacuum, and we had power that went down through the hose and to the nozzle. You could now take your nozzle, just like a canister vacuum, and go anywhere, under furniture or under beds. That became the number-one selling vacuum cleaner in the United States when it came out.
So you say again, “Well, has everything been invented?” A few years later, we said, “Wow, we do a great job at cleaning carpets, but we aren’t doing as great a job cleaning hard floors.” With carpets, you need a really aggressive brushroll to clean. On floors, you need to be able to pick up the fine dust. So we looked at that and realized they were in conflict with one another. What if we developed a vacuum cleaner that had two brushrolls: an aggressive brushroll that cleaned your carpets and a fluffier brushroll that could pick up the fine dust on your hard floors? That technology was called Shark DuoClean. Today, that’s still our best-selling vacuum cleaner.
So, finding the next problem and the next problem will lead you into new technology and new evolution. By the way, all of these things that I just mentioned to you are patents. They’re all things that only SharkNinja does at this point. But we’re constantly on this quest to find the next problem, and then that leads us into our innovation pipeline.
I’m going to push back on you just a little bit. I know the Decoder listeners quite well. I know what they’re saying to you in their cars as they listen. The vacuum cleaner market is pretty mature. It is ferociously competitive. There are products from LG, Samsung, Dyson, you name it that do all of these things and more in different ways. I hear what you’re saying. You see the problems and you innovate for the customers that you see and the problems they have.
But the market is competitive. How often do you spend thinking about where the market is going, where the competitors are getting ahead of you, and how to leapfrog them?
Nearly every day. This is what we do. We’re consumer problem solvers. We’re trying every day. Look, we had zero market share in the vacuum industry in 2008. Today, SharkNinja has over 40 percent market share in the upright vacuum cleaner market in the United States, which is the largest portion of the vacuum cleaner market in the US. We became number one in 2014, and we’ve never given that up. Why? Because we’re continuing to innovate and innovate.
We’re driving up the average sell price. You could buy a Shark vacuum for $129, or you could buy a Shark vacuum for $499. We are bringing the opening-price consumer up into our brand. We don’t have something for the $79 consumer, but I think the consumer looks at performance, value, quality, and innovation.
You’ve got to bring all four of those things together for the consumer. I think you might have innovation, but the consumer needs all of this and value is a huge component of it. The opening-price consumer can step up to a $129 Shark vacuum. The high-priced Sephora, Ulta consumer can buy a $499 vacuum. There is no brand that cuts across such a broad price range and such a broad feature range.
The other thing that I think we do a really effective job of is being the vacuum for you when you move into your college dorm room. We want to be the first vacuum for you when you get your first apartment, when you get your first house, when you have your family, when you get your first pets, and when you wind up as an empty nester. I don’t think there is a brand out there selling corded vacuums, cordless vacuums, robot vacuums, hand vacuums, or shop vacuums that is doing such an effective and compelling job of innovating and innovating while also having extraordinary value and great quality.
One of the things I think about a lot here is how companies grow. You’re describing people buying lots of vacuums over time. A long time ago, I had the former CEO of Sonos Patrick Spence on the show, and I said, “Is your whole plan that people will just get bigger and bigger houses and you’ll sell one more speaker every time?” Is that the plan in the vacuum business? People are just going to buy new vacuums at a steady clip?
I think the more macro question is how do we grow and how do we think about growth? We think about growth with this three-pillar growth strategy. One is gaining share in our existing categories. We enter categories, and within three to four years, Shark or Ninja becomes the number one or number two market leader in that category. There’s still lots of white space within our existing categories. We’re in an industry with an available [total addressable market] of $120 billion. Last year, we were a $5.5 billion business. So, we’re less than 5 percent of the overall market.
Number two is expansion into new product categories. Many companies say they can expand into new categories, but either the retailer or the consumer doesn’t let them. They don’t see them in those categories. I think we’ve been really effective at taking the Shark and Ninja brands into many different places.
Then, third is international expansion. This year, over 40 percent of our business is going to come from outside the US. So, when you think about us compared to brands that are able to scale globally, we launch 25 new products a year and we sell20 out of those 25 products n every market. The same product. We look at the consumer from a product innovation standpoint across this matrix. How does the American consumer think about a product? How does a European consumer think about the product? How does an Asian consumer think about the product? I think that’s an important point to note. We’re not just innovating for one type of consumer, we’re innovating for a global consumer.
I’m going to ask you the other Decoder question, and then I want to talk about expansion, particularly into grilling. This is our grilling episode. We spent too much time on vacuums.
Here’s the other Decoder question. How do you make decisions? You’ve laid out a lot of frameworks here. It’s clear you’ve thought about this a lot. What’s your framework for making decisions?
We have something, and you can go to our website and see it. We’re very focused on culture. Culture is our competitive advantage, it really is. We have 5,000 patents. We have great brand names. We have incredible innovation. What has enabled us to grow at a compounded annual rate of 21 percent a year for the last 17 years is the way we think. I’d invite you to go onto our website and look at a document called “Outrageously Extraordinary.” The idea is that we have this inextricable desire to be the absolute best we can be. That comes with this inherent fear of failure. How do we get rid of the fear of failure because you tend to play it safe when you’re worried about failing. So, for us, we set what we call these “unimaginably high bars” in a game worth playing.
You will seldom see a meeting at SharkNinja where you say, “let’s go after this,” and everyone in the room walks out and says, “I think we can do that.” Most people are going to walk out of the room saying, “How the hell are we going to do that?” We’ve just set a bar that seems absolutely impossible. So, we think that courageous leaders set an unimaginably high bar in a game worth playing. Even if you fall short of that, you will still do something extraordinary. If I set out to have number one market share going from zero, and that’s our goal and we wind up being number two. But hey, we started from zero. So we’ve got to set a very high bar to start.
The second is this idea of leading with a relentless desire to know more. Answers in business are not surface level. People want an easy answer to a tough question. The answers lie deep, deep in the business with trying to understand the root cause of the problem. What is the mousetrap that you’ll create that will besustainable, that can’t be disintermediated by a Chinese factory that’ll come in and sell a low-cost product on a platform? So how do we have this desire to know more, or know more than anyone else that is competing against us? We want to be explorers, not tour guides.
Most of what we’re doing, is in uncharted territories. My expertise ran out eight years ago. I’m running on fumes when it comes to expertise at this point. Every day, we’re exploring new territory. We’re pivoting quickly. We’re getting smarter every day. We use the phrase “we reserve the right to get smarter” at the company. We make a decision, new information comes in, and we decide tomorrow that we’re going to change the decision. I think one of the things that many companies, or many leaders, get stuck in is saying, “I made a decision, so I just have to go in that direction.”
We want to constantly be on the lookout for if the decision we made was stupid. I stood up in front of our town hall at a corporate meeting a number of months ago, and there were some questions about changes that we had made last year. I said to the organization, “I made a change because previously I was being stupid and I’ve decided now to be un-stupid.”
What was the change?
The concept of un-stupid went viral around the company. People felt empowered to say, “I want to be un-stupid today. We’re going down this path. It doesn’t seem like we’re going to be successful. Let’s pivot and change.” SharkNinja’s not curing cancer. We’re trying to delight consumers. We’re trying to positively impact people’s lives.
So, the change that you mentioned is how we were investing dollars in the company. We have to stay focused and invest dollars in areas of growth: growth when it comes to product development, growth when it comes to geographic expansion, growth when it comes to marketing and building awareness for our brands. I think we got too scattered and went after too many shiny objects.
There are lots of great initiatives for a company to go work on, but you also need focus. You need to make sure there are certain things that are sacred in a company, and that’s what requires the investment. Everything else might have to wait in line. You just can’t do everything at once. So, we had to pull back on some of those things, and we had to make some tough decisions about where we were going to invest and where we were going to hold for a little while, and then relook at it going into the next year.
This is a perfect tee up for your decision to invest in grills, but I have to know, what did you pull back from? Was there anything specific?
I think we went after a lot of technology projects. We were implementing Oracle at our company. We were re-platforming our e-commerce site. We’ve got this great partnership with Salesforce, and we’re launching a new e-commerce site in September. There were certain things that were just really mission-critical. There were other things that were really just nice-to-haves. They were not going to make or break our business, they were not going to create a competitive advantage. So, we had to decide what are the most important things and what it isn’t the right time for.
All right. Let’s put all this into practice and talk about grills. I love talking about grills. Can you tell? I’m eager to do it.
Great.
This is one of my favorite episodes of the year, to talk about the grill industry. You’ve laid out a lot of frameworks here. You’ve said, “We should have to deserve to be in the market. We need something better.” You’ve laid out not wanting to get away from the core areas of growth. The grill market is ferociously competitive and extremely well-served with lots of innovative companies.
It feels to me like the people who are really into grilling like having different kinds of things as opposed to just one thing. I see it in backyards all over my town. If you got one, you’ll soon have two. It’s also been disrupted. One of our very first grill company guests was Roger Dahle, who founded the grill company Blackstone. He’s in the middle of buying Weber. He actually couldn’t be on this year because of antitrust. He has to go through FTC review to buy Weber. That’s a big disruption. He bought the market leader. Why enter this market? Where’s the differentiation? How do you think you can get to number one?
I think you have to go back to the fact that Ninja is the kitchen market leader. We built up a lot of brand equity in air fryers, ovens, cookware, blenders, coffee makers, and all kinds of things in the kitchen. So, three years ago, we decided that it was time for us to go outdoors, and we did it by developing a product called the Ninja Woodfire Grill, which is a grill, a smoker, and an air fryer. It was all electric and it sat on your tabletop. We felt like there was a really unserved need. I’ll give you examples. People who live in apartments can’t have propane, but they can have electric outside — campers, RVs, boats, and things like that, along with tailgates, and you can just plug it in.
We found that people who owned a grill weren’t going to invest in another smoker. So, we found that people would be interested in buying something that was small and could fit on a tabletop next to their outdoor grill, or vice versa. If they owned a smoker, now they could own a grill. We saw this in the vacuum cleaner business. You have an upright vacuum, a cordless vacuum, a robot vacuum, a hand vacuum. So, we went into the market, and in a very short period of time, we took big market share. We’re the number-one selling electric outdoor grill right now. We sell a number of different versions of it. We then went into outdoor ovens. So, we’ve got a really great–
Wait, can I just ask something? Sorry, you’re just in my wheelhouse. Having the number-one selling electric outdoor grill feels like a small part of a huge category.
It is. But you have to understand that you have to enter in a place where the consumer accepts you, and then you have to figure out what’s next. So, we go into tabletop grills and then expand from that into tabletop ovens. Now, we’ve got this outdoor oven that allows you to cook up to 700 degrees Fahrenheit, roast, and make pizza in it. That becomes a nice business for us globally.
Then, we decide where to go next. We’re doing great in tabletop, but now, as you said, there’s this big $5 billion market around large format, outdoor cooking products. So, we look at it, put ourselves in the shoes of the consumer, and ask, “What’s the empathy of the consumer?” The consumer goes to the Home Depot parking lot on Memorial Day weekend and tell one of the orange aprons that they want to buy a grill. The person says to them, “Well, do you want a grill, or do you want a smoker? Do you want a pizza oven, or do you want a roaster or a griddle?”
That becomes the first problem for the consumer. “I’ve got to make a choice.” Maybe there’s multiple grills outside in your neighborhood, but this person is saying you have one to choose from. “What do I do? Do I want a griddle? Do I want a grill? Do I want a pizza oven? Do I want a smoker?” So, we started with that and thought it felt like a really credible problem for somebody to solve. It took us two years, but we developed the world’s first grill that’s powered by propane, electric, and a cyclonic fan. That’s three things. There are incredible patents and technology in this product.
Now, if you have those three things, what can you do? You can have incredible temperature control. Once I have incredible temperature control and I can move and circulate the air inside, I can grill, smoke, have a fully functional pizza oven, griddle, and roast. We called it the Ninja FlexFlame, and it’s the world’s first product that can do all of those things under one hood.
So, we envisioned a world where the consumer can now go to the Home Depot parking lot, ask that same question to the orange apron, and that person will respond, “Well, sir or ma’am, you could either have a grill or a smoker, or Ninja’s got something that does it all.” And not just something that does it all and does it so-so. It grills like an incredibly professional $1,000-plus griller, smokes as well as a $1,000 smoker, makes Neapolitan pizza in a few minutes, griddles, roasts, and has incredibly even cooking performance.
We came out with that product a couple of months ago. You can go online and look at it. It’s a 4.6-star rated product. It’s doing great. We launched it with an ad campaign with David Beckham. We think this opens up a whole new global opportunity for us.
You said cyclonic fan. There’s that fan again. This feels like core technology for you guys. Is it related to the Shark fans?
Well, sure. We understand airflow, we understand motors, and we understand electronics. Think about your grill 10 years ago. You put a bunch of charcoal into a pot, you lit it up, and it had some flame and it grilled for you. This product’s got a cyclonic fan. It’s got amazing amounts of electronics in it for precision temperature control. It has wood fire pellets that allow you to smoke. It has electrical power and it has propane power. What would a team of 1,300 engineers be thinking about if they wanted to build the most amazing product outdoors? I believe most consumers aren’t in a position to be able to have four different products on their outdoor patio.
So we came out with this product, and we launched it at $999. We think this product offers breakthrough innovation, market-leading performance, great quality, and an extraordinary value for what it delivers.
I apologize, but I’ve had a lot of grill company CEOs on the show. I’m telling you, it’s one of my favorite episodes of the year because all of the grill industry’s problems are the problems that every other company has, but we don’t think about that industry in the same way.
So, I would broadly describe the business models of your competitors in the grill industry as breaking down into two camps. There’s Big Green Egg, which wants to sell you a very expensive product that will last for a lifetime and that you will pass on for generations. They’re owned by a family foundation, and they’re not chasing profits in that way. It’s totally fascinating. There’s some high-end grill companies that also think the same way. Then there’s everyone else, and they say, “We’re going to put a hunk of metal outside. In three years, it’s going to rust out, and you’re going to buy a new one.”
But being able to do everything at $999 combined with, “Oh, boy, my hunk of metal rusted out and it’s going away” is not a winning proposition. So, how do you think about that cycle, because those are basically the two camps. Are you trying to last forever, or are you trying to get replaced on a cadence outside?
Look, there’s obviously a replacement cycle for the product, but our business is about innovating and putting our products into retirement before their usable life ends. It’s no different than what Apple does. If you have an iPhone 14, you don’t really need the iPhone 16 when it comes out. Your iPhone 14 is just fine. But there’s some technology. It’s got three cameras. It’s got some other things in it. That’s SharkNinja’s model. If I relied on a replacement cycle, someone would buy a product and they’d come back four years later to buy the next product. I want the consumer to get excited about what we do and say, “Wow.”
Air fryers are a great example. We came out with our first air fryer, which had four quarts of capacity and did an amazing job air frying your food. We immediately got feedback from consumers that they wanted larger capacity. So, we developed five-quart, six-quart, and seven-quart air fryers. We then found out from consumers that they were batch cooking. They were making the chicken tenders and french fries for their kids and putting in the salmon and asparagus for themselves.
We said, “What if we could develop an air fryer that could cook two things at the same time in two independent baskets?” And that became the number-one selling air fryer on the market. We then, shortly after that, found out that consumers loved that concept, but it took up too much counter space for some consumers. So we took that side-by-side air fryer, stacked the baskets on top of each other, and made the world’s first stackable air fryer.
Now, we found that consumers go home, prep their lunch, and take it to the office, or they meal prep their food for the whole week. What if we could develop an air fryer that fits in the palm of your hand? That’s a product called the Ninja Crispi. Now there are consumers who are bringing these healthy glass cooking vessels to work. They bring their air fryer pod. Instead of putting their food into a microwave that’s going to make it all soggy and mushy for lunch, they’re actually air frying their food at their desks and eating it for lunch. They’re meal prepping in the beginning of the week, and then they’re just putting their Ninja Crispi on top of it.
So, if you look at the file on our direct-to-consumer business, you have consumers seven years ago that bought a four-quart air fryer and then bought a dual zone air fryer two years later. Then, they came back two years later and bought a Ninja Crispi. That’s how we think about the business. I can tell you that two or three years from now, we’re going to come out with some innovation that’s going to be even better, even more exciting than what we developed with the Ninja FlexFlame, and it will allow the consumer to make a decision. Maybe they’ll give that product to a neighbor or their child, whatever it might be, because Ninja or Shark has come out with the next great innovation.
I’m compelled to point out that the core mechanical component of an air fryer is a fan. Just saying it! It pops up over and over again in this conversation. You’ve got a lot of fan technology. It’s wild to see how disparately it can be expressed.
You’ve mentioned software a couple of times. It’s in the FlexFlame, it’s in a lot of the other products. One of the running themes on the show is that once you start investing in software, that just becomes an exponentially increasing cost. The servers have to stay up, the apps have to be updated. Apple’s going to keep releasing new phones and change the design language of iOS on a whim whenever it wants to. Is that all in-house for you? Do you contract that out? Because one of the biggest complaints I see with smart grills and smart appliances is, “Well, I bought this expensive thing, the app broke, and now my grill is useless.”
It’s a great question. I would say that about 75 percent of it is in-house, and about 25 percent of it is out-of-house. This is an industry and a market that is changing so quickly. Having an app that is standalone on your phone, like Waze or Uber, is very different from having an app that is connected to some sort of hardware device. It’s a whole different situation. We’re the first to admit that we need to bring lots of great minds around this. So, a portion of that is absolutely outsourced, as we look at testing, validation, and development ideas. But we do have a great internal core team working on that. It works on that with our robot products and our outdoor cooking products.
The concept of an app on a product is very interesting. I remember going to trade shows six years ago where every single booth just commented, “We have an app.” I remember going down once into one of our engineering labs, and there was a blender there. A person handed me their iPhone and said, “Here, use the blender.” I went on the iPhone and I pressed go for the blender to start. I said, “Well, our blenders just have one button. Unless the app can put my bananas, my strawberries, and my protein powder into it while I’m in bed, why do I need an app on this particular product? I can just fill everything up and push a button. We have a technology called BlendSense with sensors that know when the blending is stopping.
With apps, the really important thing to understand is when the app is a vanity exercise versus when it’s bringing true value to the consumer and unlocking something in the product that they wouldn’t be able to do if the app didn’t exist. I think that’s the case with robots. There’s a case to be made with outdoor cooking. But as you said, it is very complex putting an app together with some sort of hardware and making sure that all of those pieces connect for every house, every router, every consumer that’s using it. So, we’ve got to work with both in-house and out-of-house people to help us do that.
How do you think about that cost? There’s the consumer experience of, “I bought a grill five years ago, they never updated the app. Some of my features went away because iOS changed.” That’s one side of the experience. From the company perspective, what I hear so often is, “Well, there’s no recurring revenue model for this product that supports ongoing development of this app.”
You brought up Uber. Uber’s business is that app, and it spends a lot of money developing that app. Do you have that kind of model in place where you can say, “Okay, here’s the ongoing support cost of the FlexFlame Grill that will make sure we deliver updates to the app?”
Something interesting for you to know is that we update our robot app nearly every single month, and that goes out to all of the devices out there. It could be a product that somebody bought five years ago. There’s constant, constant updates as we’re looking at data from the apps, getting testing feedback, getting return information, or getting customer service questions. We could be adding bug fixes or we could be adding new feature functionality.
But you’re not charging subscription revenue?
No, no.
So that’s just cost. So how do you think about that cost versus the margin of the product at the onetime sale?
We look at it as all about positively impacting the consumer. I need the consumer to have a great experience so that they come back and when we go into the next category, they say, “I had a great experience with this Shark or Ninja product, I’m willing to try them in the next category.” You brought up other outdoor cooking companies and other companies. You have to understand that most companies have a business model where they want to sell you a product, and then they want to sell you another product four years later when it comes to the replacement cycle. I want to sell you two products a year. I want to sell you a cordless blender. I want to sell you an espresso machine. I want to sell you an LED infrared face mask. If you have a bad experience with one of our products, I’m going to lose that whole recurring revenue stream from you as the consumer.
I’ve been doing this for 17 years. I want to do this for another 20 years. Over that period of time, there will be a finite number of consumers. And every day, as a business, you’re either gaining loyal consumers or you’re losing frustrated consumers. So when you say, “Well, what’s the ROI on that?” What’s the ROI on happiness? The ROI on happiness for SharkNinja is infinite. That’s how we’ve built our business. It’s not even a question as to whether we’ll go and do it. The answer is we have to do it. We have to make sure that our consumers are happy.
This conversation is really interesting, and there are two themes. One is that fans are everywhere, and the other one is how much you’re willing to talk about costs, things that cost money against growth. You’re constantly expanding. You’re launching 25 new products a year. It feels like you see growth as the engine that justifies whatever costs come about. Do you see an end to that growth?
Hopefully not.
I’m just asking because at some point. You’re going to run into a category problem, where you’re Apple and you have to make a car.
Look, I’ve been told that now for 15 years. “Mark, you have a $500 million business. Could it get any bigger? Now you have a $700 million business. Can it get any bigger?” If you’ve worked at a company that’s growing 1 percent or declining 2 percent, it’s tough. Inflation is going up 3 or 4 percent. There’s not much money at that point to invest, innovate, reinvent yourself, and all of those things. Part of what we’re trying to do is disrupt ourselves. We were known as Shark, the steam mop company, 17 years ago. Then, we were Shark, the vacuum company. Now, if you speak to a college-aged person, they think we’re Shark, the beauty company. We’re constantly reinventing ourselves.
So, what growth allows you to do is invest, but investing alone is not enough. It’s not enough just to have money to invest. It’s about how willing you are disrupt yourself. Are you willing to take your old business model, rip it up, throw it away, and start new again? Are you willing to pivot quickly? Are you willing to say, “I’m going down a path that likely won’t work or that someone else is going to catch up to me?”
We go into these categories… I’ll invite you after we’re done with this, and it does apply to your air model. We have a product called the Shark TurboBlade. It is an indoor fan with 350 million impressions on social media right now. It is going viral on social media. When you look at that, you say to yourself, “Well, Mark, it’s a fan.” No, it solves an incredible consumer problem that the consumer didn’t even know that they had. It also creates a category of one. We’re not in the fan business, we’re in the TurboBlade business. We’re in the comfort business. So again, growth is the pathway. But it’s the mindset and the culture that allows you to be able to say, “I’m willing to rip it all up and start over again.” We’ve got to create a definable competitive advantage.
There’s something really interesting, and honestly refreshing about the idea that you essentially see infinite new categories that will allow you to invest in some of the costs. I see a lot of your competitors saying, “Actually, to preserve our margins, we have to stop investing in a bunch of stuff because Chinese companies are coming or Amazon is available.” Amazon at this point is ChatGPT for products. You type something in, and 5,000 suppliers will show up to sell you variations of the same product.
The other piece of this, which I think is really interesting — and I want to make sure we spend some time on it here at the end — is how you think about marketing and about the brand. The brand is getting more upscale. We have a Shark vacuum from 1,000 years ago. I know that the plastics you’re using now are much higher quality than the one we have.
You’re moving up, and a lot of how you’re moving up is marketing on social media. Adweek had a story reporting that you’re spending $700 million a year on advertising. That’s 11 percent of your sales, and all that is going to creators and product placement. As we’re speaking, the whole ad industry is at the Cannes Film Festival in France right now talking about the future of the ads. I look at your spend and I think, “Oh, this is the meteorite. This is going to hit the earth, and everything’s going to change.” You’re at the bleeding edge of it. Why make that bet? How do you think that is going, and where do you think it goes from here?
Let’s go back 16 years. At that time, 100 percent of our ad spend was on what were called long-form infomercials, which were 30-minute infomercials. My partner would go on TV and run demonstrations. He and I would develop demo ideas to do. Why? Because we didn’t have any money at the time, and so we went on TV. A certain amount of the sales came to us directly and paid for the advertising expense. But a large portion of the sales went and got sold at retail outlets.
So, every company has to find their white space. So let’s start with that. People would say to me, “Well, you’re on infomercials.” Okay, but that was our way of expressing to the consumer what was unique or different about our products and the problems that we were solving, and it helped build our brands.
I want to go back to the point about the online reviews in 2008. When I was a kid growing up in New York in the ’80s, there was the Sims Store, which would say, “The educated consumer is our best customer.” Well, in 1985, there were not many educated consumers. If you had a problem with a product, you returned it to the store, and you told your mom, dad, or friend that you wouldn’t buy this product. There was no forum where you could get the information out.
So, when online reviews started, that became a great selling vehicle and a great referral vehicle for us. It evolved as you got into 2014 and 2015 on Facebook. You’d have these big Facebook group chats with 30,000 or 40,000 people exchanging recipes and ideas. Then, right before COVID and during COVID, it really started evolving into social media with Instagram and TikTok. Today, it’s so much more than that. The platform we are going to have the highest increase on this year will likely be Reddit. We’re spending more on Pinterest. We’re spending more on YouTube.
There are now these ways for consumers and creators to express themselves, and for others to be able to get information about the product. So, if you go back a number of years and you were advertising, you created one message. You created one ad, you ran that one ad at nine o’clock at night on NBC, and the only people that saw it were the people who were watching NBC at nine o’clock at night. Go look at the comments section on some of our new products. “When is this product coming to Portugal? When’s the product coming to Norway?”
Wed did a really interesting exercise. We went and mapped how buyers consume social media all around the world. You’d be interested to know that they’re not just consuming it in English in the United States, Canada, the UK, and Australia. They’re predominantly consuming it in English in the Netherlands, Poland, the Nordics, and the Middle East. So, one of the things that’s really driven the global expansion of our business is that there’s already pent-up demand for our products even before we even bring them into a market.
I’ll give you an interesting example. We were launching our Ninja Slushi in Norway. Social media got wind that one of the major retailers was going to have a Ninja Slushi product. The temperature outside was 5 degrees Fahrenheit. There were 400 people lined up outside of the store to buy a Ninja Slushi. That all came from this social media awareness that has no borders and just permeates all around the world.
One of the things I think about a lot with the creator economy is that there’s the organic demand, which you’re describing. People see things. The content can travel anywhere with little regard for borders. Then, there’s your spend. You are spending on creators and influencers. That is a huge part of the market. It is a growing part of the market. There’s a ton of excitement there. There’s a ton of money there.
I see a supply and demand problem in the influencer economy. I think the creator-branded content economy is headed towards a crash just because of supply and demand. There’s an infinite supply of creators every day, and more creators are coming onto these platforms. There’s AI, which I want to talk about for one second here, that’s creating more and more content. There’s only so many people with only so many minutes. You can see the supply is just going to outstrip demand over time. Are you seeing your rates that you’re paying influencers go up or down in response to this?
So I look at it a little bit differently. I think the crash that’s going to happen will be a big shakeout for those who are not creating compelling content. If you’re able to build super compelling content, you become very valuable to brands and to market with. I think there are a lot of people out there who are nailing it on their content, and they’re not investing in themselves, not evolving, and not continuously getting better.
You as a creator might be able to do something for a brand, and you’ll say, “Hey, I did this post.” But I think you really need to be looking at the lifetime value you could be doing with this brand, not that one post. What if I was working with a company that was coming out with 25 new products a year, and they called me up every year to work with them on five of their products? I wouldn’t be thinking anymore about the short-term impact of getting through that one post and moving on to something else. I think that is what will to evolve and change over the course of the next year or two years as the metrics and the data become much faster, much more transparent.
I think we already have dashboards in the company where we can immediately look at a person, scorecard them, and be able to say, “These are creators we don’t want to work with anymore. These are creators we want to work with tremendously moving forward.” I don’t think that was something that was looked at as closely or managed as effectively since there was this big swoop up. I think you will see that change considerably over the next 18 months. You will find that the best creators really rise to the top, and there’s a real bifurcation of the market.
When you look at those scorecards and dashboards, what are the metrics that you’re measuring to figure out who’s worth working with and who’s worth dropping?
We’re looking at engagement metrics. We’re not just looking at views. We’re looking at likes, shares, and comments, and we’re looking at the types of comments. Are they commenting about something that you did that got them excited about the product, or are they commenting about something that maybe you wore in the spot?
So, there are tools and metrics now that have allowed us to get so much more educated. If I go back even 24 months ago, you’d get excited about a post that had 500,000 views. That 500,000 views is not the answer anymore. It’s now about drilling down and really understanding if a cohort of people engaged with that content. Did they get excited about that product? What did they do once they saw it? Did they just scroll to the next one, or did it elicit some type of reaction or feedback? I think that the world is getting much more educated and intelligent about that.
I want to read you this quote from Mark Zuckerberg, because what you’re describing is a trend I see everywhere, which is that this industry is professionalizing. There’s going to be some winners and there’s going to be some losers. It’s really interesting to me that your background is in infomercials because I see all of these social platforms turning into marketing channels.
You’re describing the individual creator as something like a new generation ad agency or a marketing firm. They’re independent marketing agencies, they partner with you for a long duration, and they think of you as a client and they’re trying to deliver results to you. You could see how that would play out, but for AI. The platforms see that money, they see your $700 million, and they want it for themselves.
I say this as explicitly as I’m saying it because I have Zuckerberg here. He said this on stage at various conferences. He said it to my friend Ben Thompson, who recently interviewed him. I’m just going to read you the quote: “In general, we’re going to get to a point where you’re a business, you come to us, you tell us what your objective is, you connect your bank account. You don’t need any creative, you don’t need any targeting demographics, you don’t need any measurement, except to be able to read the results we spit out… I think it is a redefinition of the category of advertising.”
So he’s saying, “You, Mark, are going to show up, and you’re going to say, ‘I just need to sell some grills.’” Meta is going to AI generate some advertising, put it in their feeds, and deliver you sales. How do you feel about that?
I think the professionalizing piece is spot on. The multi-year journey that we go on to develop a product and the insights that we get by having the product in 1,000 consumer homes, and all of this feedback that we get prior to launching the product that informs our creative and really allows us to hone the messaging and the testing. I think there’s a model out there where people say, “You know what? Forget all that. Just put out 10,000 pieces of content and see what hits. For the ones that hit, amplify, and for the ones that don’t hit, go away.”
I still believe that with what we do, with the knowledge that we gain and the testing that we do, there is a need for great content, a real understanding of the product, and a real understanding of how the product is going to delight the consumer in their home. I think there’s a role — I call it fishing with a big net and throwing the net out there — but I also think that it is not going to be as overly simple as the way it’s described.
I think that’s the other pressure on rates, though. I can feel that coming, that the platforms will find a way to take money out of the rates that the creators are getting paid. Like Instagram, for example. Today, creators make no money from Instagram. Their money is almost entirely from brand sponsorships and other integrated marketing. I think Meta will some of that money over time. How do you feel about the rates you’re paying to your best creators now, and do you think they’re going to go up or do you think they’re going to go down?
It goes back to your supply and demand conversation and the metrics piece. I think the people who are doing amazing, compelling content will probably be more valuable, and they’re probably going to be worth more. Conversely, I think there’s going to be a whole group of people you were overpaying for, and you’re going to realize you were overpaying. You’re either going to have to negotiate those prices down or decide it’s not a fit. It’s no different than the way you look at TV networks. There are TV networks that deliver you the viewership you want at a certain price, and there are TV networks that don’t deliver it.
Again, I think this is great for the industry. I think this is great for content creators. People have said to me, “Mark, what happens if TikTok gets banned?” The content creator community is here to stay. They will find other platforms. They will go to other places. They will find ways to express their creativity and what they’re doing. They’re providing great insight to people.
I’ve got to tell you something, When I go to a city, one of the first things I do is I go on TikTok and look for the best food places in that city. There’s amazing amounts of content and information that is so useful. I think in the end, this is going to be great for the content creator community, but it is going to be a situation where those who are doing great work are going to get paid more, and those who aren’t are going to have to reinvent themselves.
Can I ask you an existential question? I know why it’s great for businesses that are trying to sell things. I can see that pretty clearly. I know why it’s great for the creators. They’re making a lot of money with essentially infomercials. I don’t know if it’s great for the people who consume media to open all the different apps on their phone, which are taking more and more time, and be awash in a sea of paid sponsored marketing messages.
Ultimately, these platforms are just becoming marketing channels. That is the money that drives the entire content ecosystem on every single one of these platforms. How do you think about that? You are a consumer of media as well. How do you experience that?
We want to be relevant wherever the consumer is engaging and consuming content. We want to be relevant wherever the consumer is choosing to shop. I think it is the error of any consumer products company to not go where the consumer is going. I think if you head off to a different place where the consumer is not, and you just hope that the consumer would go there —
No, I understand the company’s needs and why you’re there. I’m asking about you as a consumer of media, when you open TikTok or Instagram and it’s all marketing messages.
Look, as a consumer, I’m consuming content in lots of different ways. I have my Apple News feed that I open up in the morning. I have my Bloomberg subscription that I open up in the morning. I’ve got options. I don’t have to open up Instagram. I don’t have to open up TikTok. I can open it up for the purposeful things I want to open it up for. But there are lots of other ways I can get information. I think it’s really up to the consumer to make that decision.
I’ll give you a great example. We just put the SharkNinja brand on Brad Pitt’s race car in F1: The Movie. We never thought about investing in Formula 1 or movies in the past, but we were just at the premiere, and SharkNinja had incredible placement. So social media is one place. The point is how are we a part of culture? Culture could be experiential events. Culture could be movies, TV shows, or outdoors.
I’m fascinated by what LVMH has done on the corner of Fifth Avenue and 57th Street. Their store’s under construction, and they cover the entire store in a Louis Vuitton suitcase. You’ve got people on every corner snapping content in front of it. So again, I think it’s about being relevant where the consumer chooses to ingest content.
We got to add a Verge subscription to your list of subscriptions. It’s very important to me that we throw that in there.
You’ve given me so much time, this has been great. Last question. You’ve got all these new products every year. As you look out over the next 12 months, what’s the one that we should all be looking out for?
Wow. You’re going to get me in trouble if I tell you.
That’s the idea. You get in trouble right at the end.
I’m really excited about our beauty business and the roadmap we have coming out in hair and skin. I have two twenty-something-year-old daughters. That’s just a category I have a lot of passion for. My wife is a beauty enthusiast. So I’m really excited about what we’re doing in beauty.
On the Ninja side, I’m really excited about what we’re doing in the kitchen to bring things to consumers that make their homes and lives better. I think what we’re doing with the Luxe Café is incredible. The consumer can get drip coffee, iced coffee, and espresso, and can froth hot milk, cold milk, dairy milk, and non-dairy milk. I think we’re doing that in coffee. I think we’re doing that in slushies. I think we’re doing that in ice cream. I think we’re doing that in cooking. I’m just so excited. The roadmap of ideas we have in Ninja is really fulfilling this mission of positively impacting people’s lives every day and in every home around the world.
Mark, this has been great. We’re going to have to get you back. There’s a lot of stuff I didn’t get to talk about that I really want to talk to you about. So we’ll have you come back soon, maybe before the next grill comes out.
Look forward to it. Maybe fan season.
I’m telling you, once you start seeing fans, they’re everywhere.
Great. Thanks so much.
Questions or comments about this episode? Hit us up at decoder@theverge.com. We really do read every email!
]]>Today, I’m talking with Matt Mullenweg, the founder and CEO of Automattic, the parent company of WordPress.com, Tumblr, and a whole host of other products like the new cross-platform messaging service Beeper.
This is Matt’s third time on Decoder; back in 2022, we had him on twice, first to talk about Automattic and WordPress broadly and then to talk about Tumblr and the future of social networking. He’s back now because Automattic just turned 20, and I really wanted to talk about how the next 20 years of running one of the most dominant platforms on the web might look as changes to search and AI threaten to change everything else, and various lawsuits threaten to change the nature of WordPress itself.
Make no mistake, WordPress is one of the most dominant platforms on the web, if not the most dominant. Something like 43 percent of websites run on WordPress, in one of its many flavors. That includes The Verge — the backend of our website is hosted by WordPress VIP. So this might be the first reverse disclosure on the show. Technically, we’re Matt’s customer, and like any good customer, I made feature requests.
Listen to Decoder, a show hosted by The Verge’s Nilay Patel about big ideas — and other problems. Subscribe here!
A big reason for that is WordPress is open-source, and like so many open-source projects, WordPress has a very complex structure. There’s the nonprofit WordPress Foundation that owns the WordPress trademark. There’s WordPress.org, from which the open-source project is managed by Matt himself. Then there’s Automattic, which is the for-profit company that offers its own site hosting and enterprise services on top of the core WordPress technology, and which contributes an enormous amount of code back to the open-source WordPress project.
Understanding that structure is really important because there has been a lot of drama in the world of WordPress recently. Last year, Matt essentially went to war, publicly and in the courts, against a hosting company called WP Engine that competes with Automattic. Matt felt WP Engine wasn’t operating in the spirit of open-source by contributing very little back to the WordPress code base.
So Matt threatened the company with legal action and revoked its access to core WordPress technologies. Many people felt this was incredibly out of bounds for Matt and a violation of his position as a central steward of the WordPress project, and there has been significant fallout at Automattic and the broader WordPress community.
It’s been a long, drawn-out saga. WP Engine responded with a lawsuit, and Automattic was forced to reverse some of its retaliatory efforts against the company. But the legal battle is far from resolved. That said, Matt was willing to come on the show and talk through some of this thinking here, why he made some of the decisions he did, and also what he regrets about how some of this went down.
Matt and I talked about the future of the web, too, and how he’s thinking about the changes we’re seeing to search and website sustainability as the generative AI boom continues to upend how people use the internet. Matt is notably a lot more optimistic about this than many of the website owners we hear from regularly here at The Verge, and he’s not convinced AI is going to wreck the web.
We also talked about Beeper, the cross-platform messaging service that Automattic acquired last year. Beeper got into some hot water with Apple when it tried and ultimately failed to bring iMessage to Android. But Matt is really excited about Beeper’s core product. Automattic has acquired a couple other startups and effectively combined them all to try and supercharge Beeper’s growth in the coming months and years.
There’s a lot in this conversation, and Matt is as candid and sincere as ever. I think you’re going to like it.
Okay: Automattic CEO Matt Mullenweg. Here we go.
This interview has been lightly edited for length and clarity.
Matt Mullenweg, you’re the co-founder and CEO of Automattic, the parent company of WordPress, and many other things. Welcome back to Decoder.
Thank you so much. The world has changed. So much has been going on since I was last on. It’s great to catch up.
I feel like we had you on twice in one year, and that was three years ago, then many things happened, and I’ve been dying to talk to you about updates to the stuff we talked about the last time you were on. And then a bunch of new things, including some very dramatic new things, have occurred since last time.
We have some cool acquisitions and launches coming up. So yeah, a lot to cover.
Let’s start there. People are obviously familiar with WordPress. I imagine people are familiar with Tumblr, which is another thing that you were technically the CEO of, I believe. But since then, you’ve acquired other companies. You’ve acquired companies like Beeper and some others. What do you think of as Automattic today? What’s the thesis of the company?
I know you love talking about org charts and organizational structures, so it’s interesting. The WordPress side of the business we call “Ecosystem,” right? It’s like gardening. There’s a vast number of players, and that’s really kind of what we’re best known for. I’ve been doing WordPress now for 22 years. I started when I was 19, and that’s WordPress.com, it’s WordPress VIP, which we’re very proud to have Vox as a customer.
Oh, wait, I need to disclose this. This is the first-ever reverse disclosure, I think, on The Verge or Decoder. Usually, I disclose when there’s a business relationship, but in this case, we are your client.
[Laughs] Yep, so thank you. We’re honored.
The Verge runs on WordPress, so the conflict is the other way. You’ve got to keep me as a customer.
Well, I’ll do my best on this. And no, that’s actually the thrill of it too, is seeing publications you follow and things like that use the software, it’s very rewarding. Now, the other side of Automattic we call Cosmos, and that’s the apps, and that’s been a very exciting place to work in the past few years.
Now, you mentioned Beeper, which is actually doing its big public launch this July in New York, so I hope to get you there. We did two acquisitions, Texts and Beeper. We combined them, and we’re very excited. I was actually just with that team a little bit earlier today. The other one [we added] just last week was Clay. So, if you aren’t familiar, Clay is a personal CRM. One of the top requests we heard from Beeper users is like, “Okay, I’ve got all my messaging apps…”
Actually, I should probably say what Beeper is. You have probably more than one messaging platform you use regularly, right?
Yeah.
So the cool thing about Beeper is that it can bring them all in one. WhatsApp, Signal, Telegram, all of that. The other cool thing it does is that it can use multiple accounts of those. So you can have multiple Signal accounts and multiple WhatsApp accounts, all in one device, and you can offer it on your desktop, mobile, everything, and it does it all securely. That’s the new stuff. We figured out how to make this all run locally on your device, and so it’s just as secure as using one of these native apps.
But what we heard is people say, “Well, now I’ve got too much stuff going on. Who’s important? What should I do?” That’s where Clay’s CRM comes in. CRM stands for customer relationship management, so usually apps like Salesforce. But this is a personal one that’s pretty slick.
When you say “personal CRM,” what’s interesting is that the throughline for a lot of what you are doing is that small businesses, businesses of all kinds, use WordPress. They’re on the web, and a lot of what the web is used for lately is a small business storefront, or a business storefront, or some commercial enterprise. Things like a CRM, a text messaging platform, all of that stuff — it connects very deeply to just e-commerce in general.
But you’re talking about a personal CRM. What’s the split for you between WordPress as an enterprise e-commerce company and WordPress as a purveyor of consumer products?
I say we’re very lucky to be part of the generation that was… they called it “the consumerization of IT.” It was led by folks like Slack who came in and said, “Hey, we’re just going to make a great user experience and it’s going to be quirky, it’s going to be fun, it’s not going to be boring, it’s going to be colorful and we’re going to build the business features. So it scales and it does that sort of stuff, but we’re going to start from that great user experience.”
There’s some enterprise software historically that didn’t start there. If you’re on an old SAP install or something like that, no one’s waking up being like, “Yeah, I got to get in there.”
Slack, notably now owned by Salesforce, which is fascinating. That’s the two sides of that equation coming together.
Well, I think these companies, including Salesforce, have been doing a lot to reinvest in their interfaces and everything else. So with Clay — and the URL’s clay.earth; unfortunately, there’s another big company called Clay that does more enterprise stuff — so if you go to clay.earth, it’ll be the personal one.
So what makes it personal versus enterprise? We start from things on your computer, like your address book. We hook in social networks, so you can put in all your social networks. We’ll kind of de-dupe it. We emphasize things like birthdays. It brings in your calendar, iMessage, and WhatsApp messages right now. That’s kind of what Clay was doing before, and what we’re going to be building now is that it’ll just plug into Beeper, and then whatever you have plugged into Beeper, however many networks, whatever you’re doing there, it’ll bring all those messages in.
Then it can start to, for example, do fun stuff like sorting your contacts by how close your relationship is, which can do clever things. Like, not just look at how often you contact them, but who’s sending more messages, which way, and is it weekdays or weekends? There’s a lot you can kind of infer once you have communication, and we’re very excited to see where that goes.
I would understand if you were saying this was an enterprise product. I would completely understand why you’ve invested in Beeper and Texts, and why you’ve invested in something like Clay, right? You’re starting a website, you’re going to do some e-commerce, you need an outbound messaging platform, and you need a customer relationship management tool. You want to know who your best customers are. This is all just value-adds to the commerce platform.
What’s the revenue model for these as consumer products? Are you going to charge for them?
Yeah, so we’ll definitely cross-promote this stuff. But what you just said — who are your best customers, that sort of reporting — that’s just all built into WooCommerce and WordPress, so you don’t need to go between apps.
As for the revenue models we’re imagining… Clay already has a Clay for Teams, so your entire team can share contacts, share updates, and you can use it in a team-like fashion. And they’ve got a pricing model there, and they were making revenue. So it was nice to acquire a company that already had a revenue model.
With Beeper, we’re still figuring it out. But what I suspect is there’ll be two things. It’ll be free up to a certain number of accounts, and if you’re a super power user and you want to connect more, there could be a monthly charge. And then the other thing is that there might be certain connections that are always paid. So let’s say you want to connect to a Bloomberg terminal chat, we’re probably going to charge you for that because you’re more of a business user.
Also, a lot of the messaging platforms support business features now, like WhatsApp for business. There’s even iMessage for business. I don’t know if you’ve ever seen this?
Yeah.
But famously, iMessage, which previously was like, “No APIs, we’re going to crush Beeper,” in a previous iteration, now has a whole integration system for it. So as we support more and more of these bridges to different networks, I think there are a lot of opportunities there.
Is the Beeper architecture still running an instance of viewer messaging apps in the cloud on your behalf and relaying them to you, or are you more integrated now?
There are still two cloud bridges, but part of what we’re relaunching is that we’ve re-architected the whole thing with the Texts technology, so it all goes local now.
So iMessage is coming locally to your phone through Beeper?
iMessage is the one that we do not support on mobile. It is supported on desktop, just like TextIt, in this sort of way that Apple said or indicated it was okay with. But yeah, we’re not going to fight that fight again. We’re way, way, way away from it. Not touching that with a 100-foot pole.
Is the goal here that these apps should be revenue-generating consumer products? Or are they good additions to the enterprise stack that also might have consumer elements?
I’m thinking of it 100 percent as creating something consumer-first, actually, that then has paths if you’re a power user to do more team-like collaborative or business-like things on it. But first and foremost, I want to get Beeper to 100 million users. I feel that’s actually sort of the first product from Automattic that has the potential to actually be really, really large because its usage is kind of a superset of every messaging network, and the power users are the most frequent users on each of those.
Right now, it’s relatively small. No one feels that threatened. If you get to 100 million users and the primary interface for WhatsApp, Signal, and iMessage is actually Beeper, those apps will feel threatened. There’s nothing keeping those companies from saying, “You’ve taken our customer away, we’re shutting you down.” Have you had those conversations yet?
Well, I think the difference is that we’re not trying to take the customer away. We’re trying to give them an interface where they can use the network even more, connect with more people, and use the business features. If they have any way to monetize, we’re just going to link to it. We’re not trying to avoid that. So we want to support each of these networks, which by the way, we’re investing huge amounts to run everything, so we’re trying to be complementary.
Because they want to be the app on your phone through which you do many, many other things. If the app on the phone is Beeper…
The model that we see people use Beeper is that they don’t get rid of the native app. They keep it. Because it’s always going to be something there, like a functionality or something, that you’re going to want the app for. And Beeper is more for managing lots of messages, getting the local LLMs, giving you intelligence across networks, things that are power user features. But I think there are a lot of power users.
So, a strange thing that is happening with Beeper now is that France is the number one country, and it started to go viral in certain ways, and some of that is people wanting to be able to check their messages without getting too distracted. They call it “Friends without Feeds,” but they still go back to the feeds, don’t worry. They’re doing just fine. It’s just sometimes, if you’re in a meeting or something, you just want to take a quick look, that sort of distraction-free mode is really nice.
That’s really interesting. One of the reasons that I’m pushing on this is that as we’re speaking, I think you’re days away from Automattic turning 20 years old as a company. Automattic, WordPress, and these other apps are all part of the fabric of the web. Broadly speaking, about 43 percent of the web runs on WordPress.
Some of these fights that Beepers has had in the past are like how do we build open architectures out of services that are fundamentally closed, use web technologies to pass that stuff to people, and what kind of fights will we have there. There’s the open source fight and WordPress that I want to talk about in depth.
But it feels like here at 20 years old, the web is changing in meaningful ways. And the web as an enterprise platform might be headed toward ever higher heights, and as a consumer media platform might be headed toward ever lower lows. I’m wondering, as you think about these investments, these tools, and the apps versus the ecosystem, whether you feel that tension playing out?
No. So I’m actually going to ask you to expand a little on what you see as these lower lows, because it feels like as we get more compute at the edge, as the devices become more powerful, broadband becomes ever more ubiquitous — you can’t escape it anywhere now with Starlink — that there’s a bit of a sort of swinging back towards these apps and user-centric things. Even the regulatory environment is very friendly.
And that’s what I would pull it apart. As an application platform, the web is, I think, at its peak and maybe with higher highs to come. Web apps are the most interesting they’ve ever been. Every powerful AI application is mostly expressed as a web app, especially on desktop. Google is literally demonstrating Veo 3 as a web app. Google CEO Sundar Pichai is like, “I’m drawing people to the desktop web to use these applications in Chrome on the web.”
Figma exists, right? It’s one of the most powerful design tools, and it’s a web app. As an application platform, the web is at its highest it’s ever been. Some of the regulatory changes, the Fortnite lawsuit, as a transaction platform, the web is going to hit higher highs because we’re going to see more transactions pushed to the web. That’s something else I want to talk to you about.
I’m saying, as a media platform, as a document viewer, the question I’ve been asking every CEO is, “Why would I start a website today?” I would start a TikTok channel. I would start a YouTube channel. That’s how you reach consumers with media. The web as a media platform seems to be at its most perilous moment, and that’s really the split I’m talking about. Applications, transactions, and the web are very clearly at a peak with potentially higher highs to come. As a media platform, media companies are going out of business on the web basically every day.
There’s a lot in there, right? Because you kind of hit the creator thing. We hit social networks. I’ll start with your question: why, if I’m popular on TikTok, would I start a website? Well, one, so you’re not a one-hit wonder, and I think we’ve seen even some of the biggest creators on a certain platform will often have trouble getting as popular on another one.
So you need to develop a direct relationship with your audience because as long as your audience is fully mediated by this thing you don’t control — YouTube, TikTok, Reels, whatever it is — you’ll have a run. But these things change generationally sometimes. People move from one to the other. The business models change, and what they emphasize changes. If you’re a creator who was just all-in on Facebook 10 years ago because you thought nothing would ever replace Facebook, you might be facing some of the same things that these media companies are facing that haven’t adapted and really embraced their users.
I think that the media thing is also kind of complex because we had a real degradation of the user experience and sort of the speed of sites, the way advertising would work, and slow down your browser, and everything. Present company excluded, but for some other media sites, you’d load them, and it’s almost like they’re having trouble. It’s hard to read the article because it keeps moving around as the ads load, and so I felt like that was a death spiral for some of these sites that might’ve over-monetized.
I’m going to go all the way now to the local stuff-
Actually, can I just push on over-monetized for one second?
Yeah.
Over-monetized. You can read that in several ways. I think what you mean is they put too much shit on the page and then the user experience was degraded, and nobody ever wants to go to a local news site again.
The other way to read it is that they had no distribution except for Google or maybe Twitter, and every page view was so scarce that they needed to eke out every single penny they possibly could because that visitor was never coming back. And that’s the distribution that’s going away. That’s why I’m saying that as a media platform, the web is at a low because all of the audience is on somebody else’s distribution, which are by and large closed platforms.
I think there’s also an aspect that you’re competing to be the best in the world, as audiences become more discerning, as there’s sort of this global competition to raise the discourse and have the best analysis. I mean, in some places we see single-person newsletters killing it, as well as media organizations and everything like that, but many others have struggled.
That’s why I was going to say the local media, because it’s a great example of where we historically had thousands of local newspapers in the U.S., as a geographic monopoly type of thing, and many of them have gone. But I’m going to go back to the ecosystem side of Automattic.
One of our most exciting mini-companies inside is called Newspack. It’s led by Kinsey Wilson, who used to be chief of digital at The New York Times. He’s sort of taken everything he learned there and is bringing that to these small newspapers with this product called Newspack, which you can think of as distribution for WordPress. So, it’s WordPress plus hosting, plus a bundle of plugins that enable all the things that these small-town papers need, like classifieds and all that sort of stuff. The fun thing about it is they’re learning from all of them and sharing the business best practices. So, porous paywalls, or I mentioned classifieds already, but people really love local news. It’s just that it couldn’t support some of the old business models.
Now, the sad thing is some publications that switch to Newspack actually save hundreds of thousands of dollars. There were some of these legacy software companies that were just charging way too much. It has a whole print component and everything like that, so you can still print it out and distribute it at the local coffee shop and everything. But I’m far more excited about actually growing their revenue through new things that are allowed, like paid newsletters or sports scores. All those sorts of things that, when you go ultra local, you can support three, five, or 10 journalists to cover a small area, which I think is important for democracy.
How are you thinking about the distribution of that? If I were to compare you to, I don’t know, Ghost or Beehiiv or Substack? Fundamentally, what Substack is selling to a large number of its top newsletter authors is growing its audience, right? If you’re Heather Cox Richardson, you’re the most popular Substacker out there. It is crazy that she is paying 10 percent of her revenue to send emails, right? Mathematically, she could get a better deal to send emails than what Substack is offering her based on that cut.
But I think what Substack would say, and what I’ve heard the company say to others, is, “We will generate new subscribers. Our network will provide distribution. That will get you new customers. This is a cheaper way to get new customers than if you move to some other standard email service, and you have to do your own marketing, your own customer acquisition.” That’s the distribution puzzle that they’re solving that appears to be worth it for some people.
As Google goes away and other platforms stop linking, how are you thinking about solving that problem for the Newspack customer? Are you going to move people around an ecosystem? Are you going to build other forms of distribution?
You said it like it was a set thing that Google’s going away and no one’s going to link to websites anymore. I think what we’re seeing aggregate across everything is that there is a lot more traffic being driven by the OpenAIs and the Perplexitys of the world. This also feels like the early days of that.
I don’t know. Maybe if LLMs never hallucinate again, people will stop visiting links, but for now, I actually find myself sometimes clicking on three or four things, even from the Google summaries that they put at the top of the search results. So I’m probably clicking on more things than I used to. When I just had the 10 blue links of the old Google, I would pick one of them and then spend time on that webpage. Now, here’s a summary, and it links to three different things, so I find myself exploring a little bit more. What we’re seeing aggregate in traffic is that what happened from 2020 to 2022 was actually worse than what’s happening now. So things are actually starting to come back a bit. I don’t know. Have you seen that with your traffic?
I think, broadly, what we see is the same thing as everyone else, which is that the shape of Google traffic is changing, and some Google services are sending more traffic, and some are sending less. They only just started saying what traffic comes from AI Mode and Search Console, so I can’t actually tell you. This is like, as we’re speaking, I believe this happened yesterday, that they started breaking out AI Mode and Search Console.
So, it’s too early to say, but we have reported on website after website that has just disappeared. The Daily Dot went from millions of Google referrals to thousands, and then the business was over, and that’s the end of The Daily Dot, and it doesn’t exist anymore.
Remember back in the day, Jason Calacanis had Mahalo, right?
Yep.
Google has always been mercurial, especially if you optimized your business around that. So, imagine that one of these creators was only on one network. You want to have many paths to the ocean. That’s what I’d recommend for any business, really, right? You don’t want to stake everything on just one partner or one business model.
I think the question I’m asking you is, there are vanishingly few paths left to the web. There are lots of paths to the web as applications. I think there’s going to be an increasing number of paths to the web from iOS apps looking to escape transaction fees by doing commerce on the web. The paths to the web as media are obviously changing. And it sounds like you’re saying you are actually seeing more traffic from the AI search engines than people expect.
It goes to different people. So, in aggregate, I am optimistic. In the short term, there’ll be a changing of the guard, perhaps, or maybe it’ll reward different sites. Again, one of the things that I think hurt some of these media sites that we talked about before, the ones with too many ads, Google started taking in site performance as part of its ranking. So, if you had a pop-up there or something like that, they would start to de-rank you a little bit. When you think of the incentive of these engines, they want the user to have the best possible experience.
Yeah. I mean, WordPress is 43% of the websites out there. I’m assuming that you can see-
We see a lot, yes.
You can see a lot. Are you seeing more or less traffic from Google than a year ago?
I don’t know off the top of my head, but I think it was flat-ish to some and then up for others.
But you haven’t seen these dramatic declines that are wiping out some publishers?
Not in the past year, no. We saw some of that four years ago.
Interesting. So, you think it’s the same amount of traffic, which is expressed differently across your network?
That’s right, yeah. And more of it is starting to be driven by LLMs.
That’s really interesting because Google will happily tell you the same thing, and then we get website owners in our inbox saying, “They took all our traffic away.”
I believe them, actually.
You hear that across the board. Business Insider just had layoffs because their Google traffic went away. That seems like the dynamic where maybe there are going to be a bunch of new media websites that have a bunch of traffic driven to them by engines.
But to your point, what’s going to be the backstop against that? There’s only one referral source left of huge value, and it’s Google. Maybe these new LLM companies and these search engines will drive some traffic over time, but there isn’t another user behavior that drives a lot of traffic to the web in that way.
There are search and search-like things, and chatbot-like search. But there used to be Twitter, which would drive a lot of traffic to some websites. Facebook used to drive a lot of traffic to some websites. Those other things have faded away. Do you see something else coming up that might balance out the incredible search dependency?
What people sleep on is the Google articles. I don’t know what they call it. It’s not Google News, but it’s that thing that if you scroll to the left on an Android or you open the Google app.
Google Discover. I know entire media companies whose business is Google Discover, just programming Google Discover, which to me feels the most brittle of all.
I actually dream of a day when Twitter doesn’t de-emphasize links again. So who knows? There are a lot more niche social networks. For example, if you’re an engineer, Hacker News from Y Combinator, but there’s one called Lobsters, which can have cool little spikes.
Honestly, I think the video stuff actually can still drive really great web traffic. People allow links in them now. They talk, or they just say something, and people click on it. It’s like this thing we saw for Beeper. The French usage surpassed English just from this one viral Reel. So, that was people going to a website.
Fair enough. I want to get to the Decoder questions because I want to talk about the other side of the web, which is the open web and the open-source nature of a lot of the stuff you work on at Automattic and WordPress. You’ve described your chart as Ecosystem and Cosmos. Cosmos is the app side. Ecosystem has the core technologies you’re building. You’ve had a bunch of buyouts and layoffs this year. How big is WordPress today?
We’re about 1,500 people.
Is that substantially smaller than it was at the top of the year?
Yeah, like most tech companies, we hired a lot in the 2020 to 2021 range. And also like most tech companies, we found we can be more efficient and move a little bit faster with smaller teams. I don’t love that, but it is a business reality.
Did anything about your leadership structure change? Did anything in your org chart change? Or is it still the two main groups?
Yeah, actually. Internally, we just did a big switch, where we have traditionally been sort of independent product silos with their own engineering, marketing, everything, and we just did a huge centralization effort. So, product engineering and design are now all centralized, and we have some new leaders there as well. We have a new colleague named Pedraum Pardehpoosh, who was at Apple for 15 years at the App Store and Airbnb. He’s helped us really reimagine how we think about product, which I’d say historically we’ve really… because my proclivity is very much on the engineering side. So that’s been really nice and really exciting.
It is actually a very different organizational structure. I think I said this last time, but I feel like all org structures are just a series of trade-offs, and sometimes you just need to make the other trade-off for a while. So, if you’ve been in one place for too long or doing things one way, you need to do the opposite to break out of whatever rut you’ve found yourself in. It could just be how you’re thinking.
There’s a real pendulum between centralization and decentralization at most companies, especially 20-year-old companies. Was the decision really just, “We’ve been doing it this way for a while. We’re just going to swing the pendulum the other way and see what happens.”?
[Laughs] Yeah. I mean, that wasn’t just it. It’s not like, “Oh, let’s just swing the other way.” It was really like, “Hey, what are some of our issues here? Ah, we’re not having some global quality. We’re getting some local maximums in certain areas. Performance management across all of this can be inconsistent. Let’s try one roadmap for the whole company and see what that looks like. Should we try this ‘every six months’ thing that a lot of companies are doing?”
We examined all of that and then looked at how that fit with what we’re hearing from the customers, what’s happening with the business and the environment, what we’re really excited about, and this is what we ended up with. We’re only two months into it. So, there are a lot of changes in the first three to four months of the year, and it’s kind of been baking the last two months. To be honest, I won’t be able to tell you if it worked until probably towards the end of the year.
What are you hoping to get out of it?
All the things the business wants. So I want happier colleagues. I want better business results. I want better retention and acquisition. I want Beeper to get to 100 million users. We have all our ambitions. Ultimately, I want to solve open source for publishing, commerce, and messaging. This is my life goal.
Everything in between is a means to an end. I try not to be overly attached to almost anything to see what happens. So much so, I’ll tell you something a little wild, which is that we were famously like the most remote distributed company ever. There are many others, but we were pretty early, and I advocated for it quite heavily. I’ve actually been exploring whether we should bring a team entirely to New York for six months to do a sprint. So essentially, that co-locates, to do the opposite of remote, to see what would happen.
Actually, I love the idea of co-working weeks, maybe not co-working for six months, but co-working weeks. We are pretty remote, and I always think, “Well, we can get together for an offsite,” but then the offsite is its own process. But actually, I just need everyone to work in the same room for a while and be in The Office together. Like the show The Office, not the office office, to like to goof around and tell jokes and just watch each other doing the actual job, not the job of making decisions at an offsite. Let me know how that goes. I’m very curious. We haven’t done it yet, but I’ve been thinking about it a lot.
A lot of what’s happening in the WordPress community is kind of a reflection of the fact that being virtual all the time breaks some trust, right? It feels like there are some trust issues with WordPress and the larger WordPress community that you might have to work through. Do you think any of this restructuring or any working together will help you through that?
It was tough during COVID because the secret ingredient for Automattic has always been our meetups. The secret ingredient for WordPress was these WordCamps and also meetups with Meetup.com. When that went to zero during the pandemic, we all know about it, but I think that there are still echoes of that period of time, which stay with us today.
I’m so excited it’s back. Part of the reason I’m on this side of the world is that I was at WordCamp Europe. It’s a couple of thousand folks. We had a lot of new folks coming. It really energizes everything. Our contributor day had like 600 to 700 people at it. So, those things are really the gateway drug, if you will, to open source participation.
The last time you were on the show, I asked you about your decision-making frameworks, which I ask everybody, and you said your goal was to push as many decisions down as fast as you could, and that you documented everything across WordPress. There was an internal blog system that you guys used. Is that still the case? Is that still your style of decision-making?
Yeah. I would say the main thing that’s changed is that we started doing some of these product reviews. So, on a periodic basis, I’ll go to basically every product in the company and we do presentations, and get feedback. Again, not something new. Something many other companies have done for a long time.
But the thing that actually made me realize we really needed to change is that last year, I took a sabbatical for three months, which is a benefit Automattic offers. Every five years, you get three months off. I had never done it, so I was setting a bad example. So I’m like, “I’m finally going to do this.” Also, that was interesting, just to get a little space. But then, when I came back, I was like, “Okay. What can I do differently?”
So I did 100 days of support with all of our different products, shadowing people, and talking to customers. I came out of it with a real sense of where we had accumulated technical debt, where we’d accumulated cultural debts, and where we had golden handcuffs in our business model, which I think is one of the most dangerous things. Because it’s not the business going down, but you can kind of see how, “Oh, if we just stay in this forever, it’s not a good look five years from now or 10 years from now.” So that was part of why I started recruiting some of the new executives we brought in and thinking about more drastic changes to how we worked.
What are some of the golden handcuffs you had in the business?
Well, just to give an example that you mentioned, our enterprise business is incredibly strong with media, and in some ways, we’re almost reaching a saturation point. There are not that many great publications left that we could bring on, and some of those publications are feeling the squeeze.
So, just industrially, from an industry point of view, there are currently — although I think this will come back — secular headwinds to that business. If we were all media, that would be trouble. But of course, we have other things, finance, a lot of startups, Facebook uses it, all these other things. But is the product as well suited? So, that’s something we have to think about.
All right. Let me ask you about the big decision. You decided that WP Engine, which was a rival WordPress host, was free-riding on open source. You decided that you were going to cut them off. Many, many things happened. I just want to start at the very beginning of this. Your decision-making process involves all team decisions. Everything is pushed down. Everything is documented. Was the decision to take the fight to WP Engine a team decision or a Matt decision?
That was a team one with a lot of community feedback.
Walk me through that specific decision, that you’re going to put a lot of pressure on this rival hosting company.
I don’t know if I can right now. I think there’s a period in the future when we can dive a lot more deeply into this. Well, you’re a lawyer, right?
My job is to get you to talk. I was a horrible lawyer.
I think something I’ve learned in this process is not to talk as much while it’s going on. We’re very much deep, where both sides are spending millions of dollars a month on lawyers. I think that there will be things that play out, but the legal system moves a lot slower than I would like. So, we’re a little bit in the middle of it right now.
But you did put a lot of pressure on this company. You cut off some of their access, and you changed some code in different ways to further cut off their access. A lot of people saw you making unilateral decisions in a way that didn’t feel compatible with open source. Were those just Matt decisions, or were those also team decisions?
I take full responsibility for it all. So, ultimately, yes. If people are unhappy with it, they should hold me to account.
One of the ways that people held you accountable inside of Automattic was that you said, “If you don’t like it, you can leave,” and a bunch of people took buyouts and left.
We did a very generous six-month and a nine-month buyout offer. We called it an alignment offer. So, at that point, we were at our very peak, around 2,100 people. Actually, we’d already started coming down. But it was clear that there were some folks who just weren’t in line with where the business was going, or we had some folks who already had another job. It was this mix of everything in there.
So, the way I read it from the outside was that Automattic is a very idealistic company. You are a very idealistic person after all. All the times we talked, that’s my impression of you, is that you are a very idealistic company — WordPress and Automattic, very idealistic projects, particularly the Ecosystem side, the open source side of WordPress.
And here is Matt, the benevolent dictator for life of WordPress, saying, “I’m going to squeeze this player out of the ecosystem in a way that reads against the ideals of open source itself.” Some people at your company were so incensed about this that you said, “You can walk, I’ll pay you to leave.”
That’s not how I would fully characterize it. So, first and foremost, I will say that it is true that my bias is towards optimism and radical openness. That’s my whole career. The downside of that, and this is not the first time this has happened in WordPress’s history, is that that can be taken advantage of. This is probably the fourth big time that there’s been a controversy like this in WordPress. It’s the first time in this media landscape, or when we’re this big. But there have been similar things in the past where, as a community, we had to say, by the way, not all the community, but a good portion of it, “Hey, there’s something that’s not okay here. And if we don’t stand up to it, it could threaten the future of us existing at all.”
I believe this was one of those decisions, or one of those situations, rather. I’m sure with the benefit of hindsight, there could be things that were done differently, probably on all sides. There’s a lot that we’re doing to make sure this particular thing doesn’t happen again. So, we’ll only make new mistakes. I will say that nothing like this has quite happened in the past, and I hope it never happens again in the future.
Wait, can you be specific about what you think happened that you need to prevent from ever happening again?
Let me think about how to put this. I think where WordPress has had the greatest success is when we can get everyone around the table — the commercial folks, the agencies, the developers, the geeks, and the anarchists. We get us all around the table and say, “Well, what are our shared goals and how will we achieve them?” Even the most rampant capitalist knows that you can over-squeeze that lemon.
You don’t have to look far to find other open-source projects where the commercial interests sucked the life out of the project. That could be talent, it could even be as simple as… I’ll give one example of something people have criticized us for, and we get a lot of pushback on. It’s like, “How come the WordPress.org directory — the app store, if you will — doesn’t allow you to buy stuff?” We allow commercial things, but you have to buy them from the developer directly. We don’t have the one-click type thing.
It’s actually a very complex sort of incentive answer. As we saw other open-source projects do that, and some of them did it kind of early, what shifted in that community was a collaborative nature, both for the core software and for add-ons, to every person for themselves. So, imagine you and I were both plugin developers, and I created a better widget and you had another widget. Now, often, what happens in WordPress is I say, “Hey, what you have is cool. Let’s combine that.” And we’ll just combine the plugin. Or say, “Hey, this should be in Core. Let’s build it. Let’s submit it. Let’s get this so everyone has it.”
Now, if you and I are both selling that, we might each be making $20,000 a year or something off this. And so, there’s a local incentive for us not to open source it to the Core or to work with each other. If you play that out over the years, what happens is probably what happened with Joomla, where users felt nickel-and-dimed with every single feature. The core software can atrophy, because all the best development went into these extensions, and it hollowed out a bit. It’s my view from the outside.
You said “we” when you talked about WordPress.org. I think one of the things that a lot of people realize throughout this entire saga with WP Engine is a quote from you, that you control WordPress.org. This is a quote that you gave to us.
[Laughs] I regret that.
“WordPress.org just belongs to me personally,” said Matt Mullenweg in an interview with The Verge.
That’s been taken out of context so many times. I regret ever saying that. It’s the worst thing ever.
So, you’re saying that’s not true?
Because you were asking about specific ownership. Like, okay, what entity? I think you even said, “What entity is it that owns this?” which is very different from how the site runs, how decisions are made, how the code works, and everything like that.
So, why doesn’t Automattic own WordPress.org?
Why doesn’t Automattic own WordPress.org? Because I wanted to keep it separate, especially in the early days of Automattic. It was controlled by investors. So, I wanted this balance of power.
WordPress predates Automattic, by the way, that there was this sort of a thing, which was not just the C Corp working for the fiduciary responsibility of shareholders. But that’s something that, yes, I kept separate and technically just I support, but I’m one of many, many people who support it.
If you look at how WordPress.org is run, just how everything works, it is the result and the fruits of clearly tens of thousands of people and hundreds who work on it daily. So, I was very sad that it got mischaracterized as just me making all the decisions and just being the thing that belongs to me. I do regret that a lot, I will say that.
I appreciate that you regret it. I’m going to push back on the fact that we’re mischaracterizing, you saying the following.
I didn’t say you mischaracterized it.
Sure.
I said a lot of other people now take it out of context and are like, “We can’t have this thing rely on someone’s personal website.”
But that is an outgrowth of this quote and this fight. I’ve seen others say there’s a supply chain weakness if you have a WordPress dependency, where Matt Mullenweg owns WordPress.org, which is the plugin repository and the update repository. And if he gets mad at you, he can cut you off, which is what happened to WP Engine, right?
And it was reversed.
Well, sure.
So, my authority to do it in the long term is apparently not that big.
But you had a commercial dispute, and because you were just in control of this, you were able to cut off their access. And I think a lot of people-
We had a moral dispute, actually. It’s a moral dispute, as well as a commercial dispute. It’s an ethics dispute.
If they had paid the money, I don’t think you would’ve had a moral dispute. If they had said, “We commit this many engineers to the open source project,” would you have still had a moral dispute?
I don’t know if I can comment there.
Well, I’m asking because, to me, the dispute reads as if this is the classic open-source free-rider problem. There’s a big, vibrant open source ecosystem. Someone’s just going to take it, run the software, and sell the hosting. Maybe they provide a better level of customer support. They’re not going to pay into the project. Now they’re free riding on what should be the margin that funds the project as a whole.
That, in the abstract, has happened all the time throughout the open source community. Usually, the answer is, well, that’s just the price you pay for open source. This is a thing that happens. This is a thing the licenses enable. But the point of open source is that, eventually, the free rider will get far enough away from the thing that they will feel required to pay back into it to do what their customers want. This is the self-correcting mechanism. It sounds like you just didn’t see that happening, or you felt that was never going to happen.
By the way, there are probably $10 billion of hosting companies that I don’t feel are a threat or harm to the future of WordPress. So, I think that you can say I’m crazy or off my rocker, or whatever, but I would like to point out a long career with very few things like this happening, and that not everything is public. If I really felt like it was that much of a threat to the community, yes, I’m going to stand up. But we try to run things in a way that that happens very rarely, or not at all.
Do you think that a good solution here is for you to cede more control of WordPress.org back to some sort of central body? Because that feels like one of the main criticisms of this entire situation, is that you personally have control of what feels like a very centralized dependency for the WordPress ecosystem.
Yeah, and I can see why people see that because I’m really the spokesperson for a lot of these things.
Well, again, I know you feel this quote is mischaracterized. I’m just saying that I’m looking at a quote from you to us that says, “In my role as owning WordPress.org, I don’t want to promote a company which is legally threatening me in using the WordPress trademark. That’s why we cut off access from the servers.” To me, we quoted it. I don’t feel like we’re mischaracterizing it. But that’s you saying, “I have an enormous amount of power here and I will use it.”
I feel like I have an enormous responsibility to the tens of thousands of people who contribute to WordPress.org and WordPress on a regular basis. I feel like I have a responsibility to be the focal point for the arrows and the hate. So, developers who are actually writing all the code for WordPress and people who might not feel comfortable being the face of some of these objections don’t have to be. I’m happy to do that for them.
You’re 20 years into it. Open-source projects rely on characters like you a lot. Linus Torvalds, I think, is the most famous example of what we literally call “benevolent dictators for life.” At the end of the day, you can have all the hippie ideals you want, and then you need one person to take the arrows. That’s what you’re describing, one person to make some decisions and hold the value. Again, this is a pattern that repeats in many, many, many open-source projects.
Sometimes, that might be representing a minority. In many of these fights, it might not be the most popular thing to do. You really have to believe it’s the right thing to do, though. And history will show whether you’re on the right side of it.
How long do you think until this dispute is resolved? Is it just going to happen in the courts? Are you going to settle?
That’s a good question. I wish I could answer that. I really, really want to get back to the most collaborative version of WordPress possible. I think the complement, WP Engine, has an incredible set of talent. They have a lot of customers who are happy. I think they have a lot they can give back, to do, and to grow WordPress and their use of it. So, yeah, I’m optimistic. I’m generally pretty optimistic. There have been times I wasn’t, though. And I will say that the legal system and the whole law thing are incredibly challenging. If you’re an entrepreneur listening to this, I would say avoid it as much as possible.
We’re lucky to work with incredible, credible lawyers, but I think my disposition is much more on the product and engineering side. So, I remember that Steve Jobs quote where he said, “Look at how you’re spending your day and how you feel at the end of the day and everything.” And definitely, I want to get back to where that’s where I’m spending the vast majority of my time.
I just want to go through some of the moves here, and then I promise I want to talk about Tumblr to wrap this up. Mostly, I just want to talk about Tumblr with you, but I just want to go through some of the moves here. You cut off their access to WordPress.org, and you rewrote some plugins in a way that I think people felt was way over the line. You called them a “cancer.” Automattic stopped contributing to WordPress Core. You ramped it down. You’ve ramped it back up. Do you think that you were too aggressive? Do you think you went over the line? A lot of those moves are ones you’ve walked back.
I don’t know yet. We’ll see.
Why’d you walk them back? For example, not contributing to WordPress anymore? You walked that back. Why’d you walk that back?
So, remember I said you sometimes have to try the opposite. [Laughs] I mean, after 20 years of Automattic, there’s basically not a day, including weekends, that we haven’t done some work on core WordPress or other open-source projects. And again, not just me. When you’ve devoted so much of your life to giving back to something and it’s a very, very small group, but there’s some of that that’s just attacking you, everything you do, and you sometimes need a little break. So, think of that almost like an Automattic sabbatical, just like a person might need a sabbatical.
What I was really hearing internally is that people want to regroup. It’s also a good opportunity because we’re making some of these other big changes to bring some, for example, core WordPress engineers over to WordPress.com and say, “Hey, what can we do? What could make this a better WordPress experience?” It was also an opportunity to reboot some of our development efforts that I’m glad we did, actually. But we missed it.
You missed doing it.
[Laughs] I can’t quit it. Honestly, I think I’m going to have to do open source for the rest of my life. It was torture for me, because we were like, “Okay, now I guess we need to not do any more relief. We don’t have enough stuff for a release, and so we’re going to have to push that.” That broke my heart, and then I just couldn’t stop thinking about it because we kept developing technology. And one thing we do is develop it on the Automattic side, and then we bring it to the open-source community. So, we had all this stuff developing, and there’s real-time co-editing and really exciting stuff. I’m like, “Oh, I got to get this out there.”
I’m going to tell you right now, the entire Verge team just heard you say real-time co-editing. When are you shipping simultaneous editing? As you know, when Vox Media moved to WordPress, this is the only thing I asked you for, and you told me it was coming. When is it coming?
I’m excited about it.
Is it this year?
It’s a “this year” thing.
It’s this year?
Murphy willing, yeah.
All right. And we’re going to hold you to that. By the way, you mentioned an Automattic sabbatical. I connected your sabbatical to this fight. There was a lot of hostility, a lot of back and forth, a lot of just pent-up anger. And then you took a sabbatical. Did this push you to do that?
No, that was like eight months away [from the lawsuit] or something. It wasn’t that close.
Okay. All right, let’s talk about Tumblr. You bought Tumblr ages ago from Verizon for some reason.
I actually just ran into [Verizon CEO] Hans Vestberg at an event. We talked.
I don’t mean you bought it for some reason. What I meant is Verizon owned it for some reason, and the idea that you bought it from Verizon is still very funny to me, because why did they ever own Tumblr? You migrated the entire backend of Tumblr to WordPress.
No, no, we have not. We put that project on hold.
I swear I read a press release.
We announced that we were starting work on it.
Is that still not going to happen? Or why’d you stop it?
What we decided is that we want to focus as much on the things that are going to be noticeable to users and that users are asking for. This was more like an infrastructure thing, kind of like any big re-architecture. I still want to do it. It’s just cleaner. But right now, we’re not working on it.
One of the reasons that you wanted to do that back then, or at least when we first talked about the very idea of doing this, was that you saw some opportunity for ActivityPub. And there’s an ActivityPub plugin in WordPress. You bought the plugin from the developer and hired the developer. I’ve met him, he’s lovely. You can see, “Oh, that would really work for Tumblr. You move Tumblr to this backend, you have this plugin, and now you’ve got Fediverse Tumblr.” Do you still see that as an opportunity?
Yeah, so that would’ve been a free way to get it. And so that was one of the arguments for migrating everything to WordPress. And still going to do it someday, but in the meantime, I think if there was a big push to implement Fediverse, we would just do it on the Tumblr code base.
Is Tumblr growing? What are the user numbers there right now?
I would say Tumblr has a passionate, “never going to give you up” cohort of users, and it still acquires users at the young end. I’ll also say that the elements of how it works, I think, are very confusing if you’re new to it. So, one thing we’re thinking about is how we can make it a bit more accessible. And also, the constant thing you deal with at any social network is how to keep it friendly. So we want it to be someplace where you can go on the internet and leave refreshed, interact with art and artists, and your friends. On these networks, you have to do a lot of work to keep out the spam and the bullies.
You’ve personally waded into some Tumblr content moderation controversies.
Oh my goodness, yeah.
Particularly around trans people. It’s a very bad time for trans people in America right now. Is that something you still want to be the face of? There’s a lot of pressure on that community, and that community is very, very focused on Tumblr.
Yeah, and so what I learned from that is that… I jumped in because it’s a community I care about deeply and want to show support for, but everything I did to try to show that this wasn’t targeting, then got twisted, or turned around, or a lot of misinformation. So, the learning is, and by the way, many other people would’ve told you this, is just don’t comment on content moderation decisions. Just point all that to the terms of service, the team, and everything like that. More explanation does not make it better.
Again, probably one other lesson from 2024 is that, particularly in open source, often we talk through it, we post through it. And we have these vigorous debates, and we come out the other side, often with a consensus, or at least a shared view of reality. And in the media landscape of today, that doesn’t happen, sometimes ever. So, it’s just better not to try to engage with everything. And, as an early internet person, this drives me crazy sometimes, but I think I’ve learned that lesson.
One of the reasons I’m asking about this, again, is that this is just a bad time for a lot of marginalized communities in America. I think of Tumblr, I think of young people, I think of queer people, I think of people of color. A lot of the culture begins on Tumblr, from those communities. It is not clear to me that the big platforms are committed at all to making those communities feel safe any longer. They might’ve been.
Why do you say that?
There was a time when, performatively, these platforms wanted these communities to feel safe. I think Instagram is deeply aware that Instagram is not the same without gay people and Black people on it. They know, they just know, but they are playing a different game with the Trump administration.
Tumblr is sort of out of the limelight. Are you going to do anything to try to make those communities feel safer there? It feels like an opportunity to take people from the big platforms and put them in a place where creativity and free expression are more valued in that specific way.
I know there’s a narrative that these bigger platforms have changed their mind there. I would challenge that. They might be doing things performatively there, but I bet if you went to the on-the-ground person who does the very, very tough job of looking at the worst stuff on the internet to protect the rest of us, that’s someone like a firefighter or a police officer. I think we will appreciate that job so much more in the future because they’re essentially sacrificing some of their mental health to protect the rest of us. I would say they are — with very, very few outliers who get weeded out and fired immediately — there for all the communities you spoke about, and driven by a sense of trying to protect and help safety.
On Tumblr, it’s the work we do every day, and I want us to be, again, judged by the results and the actions. It doesn’t mean that there will never be a mistake. In fact, we’ve actually had to let someone go before because they weren’t operating in line with the values that we have as a company, or in line with our terms of service and everything like that. But yeah, that is the exception that proves the rule, I believe. It’s hard to see that from the outside, though, because you don’t see the hundreds of thousands or millions of things that are moderated every day. You see the one time it messes up.
Yeah, I understand, broadly and across the industry. I certainly understand that content moderators, no matter where they work, have horrible jobs.
I’m just saying that I look at Meta, which is saying very publicly that it’s shutting some of this moderation down and going to use community notes, and then Mark Zuckerberg is going to be in the White House. I think, “Well, there’s a whole community there that feels under attack by just the gestalt of that. Just the way that feels is bad. And Tumblr exists, and Tumblr has always been the place for those communities to go. It is what makes Tumblr, Tumblr.
I’m just wondering if you see it as an opportunity to claw back some share from the billionaire-owned big platform companies that feel like they’re playing a vastly more political game.
Yes, and we do see waves of people come over when these incidents happen in various places. I think what we have to do now is retain those folks because the app needs to be super fast and performant. The ads need to be good. By the way, some of the criticism I made of media things, you can make about some of the advertising we have in the Tumblr app today. Not all the ads are to the standard that I think we should be held to. The app needs to just be more intuitive than I think it currently is.
I think what happened is that Tumblr invented so much stuff. It was like the pioneer that had images on posts, things like that, before any other social network did. We got kind of attached, as a team, to some of the different ways we did things. Now, in the meantime, across every social media platform, there’s almost like a set of primitives that are universal, like the Platonic ideal of certain interaction modes or how things should work. For instance, replying, commenting, liking, and liking something versus viewing the likes.
There are affordances in the interface with so many of these things. And when you drift too far from that, it just creates a lot of mental friction when you use it. So what we have to navigate is maintaining the character of Tumblr, and everything that people love about it, while also not frustrating you when you go between different apps or different experiences.
Everything is turning into TikTok. Do you think Tumblr needs to turn into TikTok?
No, I don’t think so. And there are definitely ways I want to evolve the business model. We’ve invested a lot in subscriptions and things like that. Self-serve, first-party advertising, which we’ve gamified. You can advertise someone else’s thing. So I think those models, at scale, could be a non-TikTok incentive. Like, it will be smaller than TikTok forever, but it could create different incentives in the business model that I feel pretty good about.
Is Tumblr sustainable today?
It is still not profitable. So we’re still supporting it and subsidizing it with our other products at Automattic.
How much runway do you want to give it?
Everything. Obviously, we’ve invested a ton in Tumblr. I’m a believer in its future. And so that’s part of why I want to make it sustainable, because that means it doesn’t have to go on the benevolence of myself or anyone else. It can stand on its own.
There was a report last year from 404 Media that part of the revenue model would be to sell Tumblr data to Midjourney and OpenAI for training purposes. Is that true? Is that going to be part of the revenue mix?
Gosh, where are content licensing things? So, Automattic has done content licensing deals in the past. Often, it’s things that people already had, because it was on the web, so it was already part of the indexes and other stuff like that. I don’t think that’s going to be a big part of the revenue model going forward, and the whole AI content thing, fair use, everything, feels like the question that will work itself out in the legal system over the next five to 10 years.
So wait, do you have a licensing deal for OpenAI to train on Tumblr data?
I don’t think I can comment on which deals we have or which we don’t, but I will speak more generally about how the AI content licensing thing feels very much up in the air.
Do you want to have those deals?
I want creators to get paid for their creative work. Absolutely.
So if you had that deal, you would pass the revenue through to Tumblr creators?
Well, passing revenue through, you have to have a certain threshold of revenue. [Laughs] You have to know your customer, and you have to get tax information. So there are thresholds at which I think we need to get to, where this can become part of what can contribute to creatives. I don’t see a path for that right now, but it’s definitely something that I know at least some people at the AI companies are thinking about. And I’m hopeful for it, something there. But I don’t know what it’ll be. I don’t think it’s going to be micropayments. I don’t think it’s going to be crypto. We’ll see.
I want to end by just talking about the future of the web, and really just about the open protocols: ActivityPub, AT Protocol, and Bluesky. The last time we spoke, ActivityPub felt like it was going to be the winner, just by default. Threads had adopted it, everyone was talking about it, and there were a lot of services being built on it. You were really high on it.
Then Bluesky showed up, and all the people on its network are sort of on that protocol, right? Threads is, obviously, a big player, and they’ve launched a bunch of Fediverse features with ActivityPub, but it’s not driving adoption, maybe, in the way that Bluesky’s community might drive a bunch of adoption of AT Protocol. There’s stuff that bridges them together, but we’re having a protocol fight. Here we are having an open interoperable protocol fight. This is some Matt Mullenweg stuff. How do you think that’s going to play out?
Oh, that’s a good question. I think the failure mode of internet idealists is protocol-first thinking. So what I would love to do — and actually, maybe I should host this — is a summit where we get together and don’t argue about how the servers are talking to each other, but what our current and potential audience, the customers, the users, wants the most, and how are they not being served by the competition. Because that’s the other thing we do, we say, “Oh, we just make this network, the people will come,” and miss all the network effects and the lock-in effects of these social networks with billions of people on them. So it’s tricky.
Even email, sort of the most famously open thing that’s still running, is effectively closed down for most people. If you run your own email server, most of your email is going to go to spam, to whoever you send it to, on Gmail, and stuff like that. So we’ve had a re-centralization of a decentralized protocol. And this is the kind of thing that can happen if you don’t have the right incentive structures in place for something that is very, very open. And this is kind of like a version of the problem that I’m trying to avoid in the WordPress community and the open-source projects that we support.
So, I wish I had an easy answer for you. I think the best way that we’ll get there is with a relentless focus on the design, the user interface, and iterating as fast as possible, and not getting locked in these local maximums of what your existing user base might be. Sometimes you have to do something incredibly unpopular with your existing user base to get to that next level, to unlock the order of magnitude of growth that’s the billions of people who don’t use it yet.
Another mistake we make in open source is that we talk about how the community wants this, or the users want this, but we have to account for the voices of the 7.9 billion people who don’t use WordPress yet. And that’s tricky.
I was really high on interoperable social networking, and interoperable sites using ActivityPub or AT protocol. It doesn’t matter to me, actually. At the end of the day, I just want to see more interoperability of these networks. Do you still think that’s going to happen?
Yeah, if I had a bet on one, actually, you know what I’d bet on is the Matrix protocol, the dark horse in the corner.
A third one out of nowhere. Just briefly explain what that is, and why.
Matrix is taking more of a messaging-first approach. So think of it kind of like an open-source Slack. It’s what Beeper actually used as a backend in its cloud version. There are also cool extensions to it that can do things like pure peer-to-peer. That feels like a disruptive technology, that if I had to just put five, a bet for five bucks on it, a long-term call option or something, I would maybe put it on that one.
All right, Matt, this has been great. You’re going to have to come back again sooner than three years. I feel like I have a million more questions for you, but this is so great. Thank you for all the time.
Well, maybe we’ll celebrate the co-editing.
The day you launch it, I’ll give you a full day, a 24-hour live stream on Decoder, the day you launch co-editing.
Awesome. Thank you. It’s been a pleasure talking. And thank you so much for what you do, and also for advocating for the open web and open protocols. I really appreciate it.
We run the last website on earth, Matt, you know how it is. Thank you.
Questions or comments about this episode? Hit us up at decoder@theverge.com. We really do read every email!
Correction, June 30th: An earlier version of this article misstated the steps of the legal battle between Automattic and WP Engine. Mullenweg accused WP Engine of trademark infringement and cut off its access to WordPress servers; both companies sent cease-and-desist letters, and then WP Engine, not Automattic, initially filed a lawsuit.
]]>Today, I’m talking with Hinge founder and CEO Justin McLeod. Hinge is one of the biggest dating apps in the United States — it’s rivaled only by Tinder, and both are owned by the massive conglomerate Match Group, which has consolidated a huge chunk of the online dating ecosystem.
A fair warning here: I’ve never actually used a dating app — the algorithm that matched my wife and me was the university housing lottery, which put us in adjacent dorm rooms in the fall of 2000. And my wife is now a divorce lawyer, so playing around with these apps seems a little bit risky. So I always end up approaching conversations about dating apps a little bit removed.
Listen to Decoder, a show hosted by The Verge’s Nilay Patel about big ideas — and other problems. Subscribe here!
I asked Justin what it’s like to be the married CEO of a dating app company who doesn’t use his own product anymore, especially as his own personal romantic journey is very intertwined with Hinge. The entire idea of the company and how it has evolved over the years connects to Justin’s own life and his decision to reconnect with his college girlfriend, just a month before she was supposed to marry someone else. The story is so unbelievable that it was turned into an episode of Netflix’s Modern Love.
You’ll hear Justin explain how that experience connects to the company’s values, culture, and his vision of what Hinge is really for — and how all of that is geared toward helping people find lasting connections. Hinge bills itself as the app that’s “designed to be deleted,” and that, of course, is in deep tension with how mobile apps and services grow users and revenue.
Then there is the AI of it all. Hinge, as part of Match Group, is using AI both internally and within its product, just as Tinder and other competitors are. There’s AI coaching features to help you improve your profile, pick better photos, and even catch an inappropriate message before it gets sent.
But pull the string on all these ideas, and you get to a place where people might be talking to AI all the time, even falling in love with it, or having AI agents dating each other before meeting in person. Justin had some pretty strong feelings about the importance of centering real human connection and encouraging people to put their phones down and go out on dates in the real world. Justin also called the idea of AI companionship “playing with fire” and compares those relationships to junk food.
There’s a lot more in this conversation. We got on the topic of the Trump administration and how seriously Hinge takes the privacy of its users’ data during an unprecedented crackdown on LGBTQ+ rights. We talked briefly about Apple and its App Store restrictions, now that companies like Epic Games and Match Group are free to send people to the web to process in-app purchases. Hinge has some plans that you’ll hear Justin get into near the end. There’s a lot going on in this one; you might even fall in love.
Okay: Hinge CEO Justin McLeod. Here we go.
This interview has been lightly edited for length and clarity.
Justin McLeod, you’re the founder and CEO of Hinge. Welcome to Decoder.
Thanks for having me.
I’m excited to talk to you. I’ve got to tell you, this is one where I feel like Jane Goodall or a sociologist of some kind. I’m old. I’m married to a divorce lawyer. I can’t even download this app. It’s too risky. I’m watching through the looking glass here. I asked my younger staff for their Hinge feature requests. Don’t worry, I’ve got a million of those.
Great. Excited to hear those.
When TaskRabbit comes on Decoder, I’m like, “I booked a TaskRabbit.” This is very different. When was the last time you actually used Hinge as a user?
Over a decade ago.
Wow.
Yeah.
What’s that like? What’s it like trying to run this team? Is it all just data driven for you, because there’s a real element of dogfooding here.
Yes, definitely. We have a lot of single people on our team at Hinge, so there’s a lot of internal dogfooding for sure, and a lot of opinions. I think that the relationship is different. So, I started the company in 2011, and I was single at the time, and I was single for the first four years of Hinge, and then, long story: I got back together with my college girlfriend, and we’ve been together for the last 10 years, married with kids and all.
Did you get back together on Hinge?
We were together. I tried to get her back. She said no. I started Hinge in response to that. And then someone whom I met on Hinge inspired me to go back. She was about to get married to someone else. She was living in Switzerland. I flew over a month before the wedding. She called off her wedding and moved back to New York, which led to the whole reboot of Hinge. The whole story is very interconnected.
I feel like I should throw out my questions. We should just do an episode of Call Her Daddy or something like that. That sounds very complicated.
Yeah, it’s been a ride. An incredible ride, and very intertwined with Hinge. But back to your question, I think that we can overweight our own personal experience a bit, especially as the CEO of the company. What I found over time is that people have a wide array of very diverse experiences, and to some extent, I think it actually helps that I’m not in there overweighting my own niche feature requests that would matter to me but not to the whole population. So the app has evolved. It’s more about helping others than it is about helping myself, which was probably the original idea of Hinge.
How do you think about the connection between what the data is telling you, the data about what Gen Z daters are doing versus millennial daters, which is the cohort you started with, versus the very emotional experiences people have on this platform, which are out of your control? Eventually, you’ve got to take the meat sack to the bar and look at the other person and not fuck it up, right? Hinge can’t solve that problem, but that’s the heart of the whole enterprise. How do you connect those two in your brain?
This is a very complex, nuanced industry. I think sometimes people look at their Hinge feed and they’re like, “Why doesn’t this understand my taste as well as my TikTok feed does?” People don’t quite understand that people aren’t products; they’re not infinite copies of everyone. They don’t always behave the same. Your videos on TikTok don’t have to like you back. There’s just a lot of nuance to getting this right.
And you’re right. A fair amount of this comes down to the people on the platform. So what we’re trying to do is to [not only] build a great product but also an environment and a community where people are encouraged to be intentional and authentic, and attract users who are looking to find their person. So that’s definitely the art and the nuance of trying to build a dating app like ours.
One of my big criticisms of social media apps right now in 2025 is they’ve all become marketing platforms in some way. At the end of the rainbow, Mr. Beast is trying to sell you an energy bar. That’s what they’re for. And smaller creators are trying to get their first-brand deals or whatever. But there’s a real organization around just marketing. And the platforms try to encourage people to create content for a whole number of reasons, but their reason for being is advertising spend, and then a lot of the content creation on the platform happens for marketing purposes. You can just see how it goes.
Hinge and other dating apps are different. You’re trying to incentivize content creation. You’re trying to get people to talk about themselves, to talk to each other. The goal is to market yourself. How do you divorce that from the actual thing you’re trying to do, which is to have people fall in love and get into stable relationships?
Well, it’s very much about what you’re optimizing for. And you’re right; social media is ultimately optimizing for engagement, retention, and time in app. That is the lifeblood of any of these companies. How long can they keep you sucked in? That is their objective, and so everything is built around that. And we’ve seen what the consequences of that are. They’re pretty dire.
I think Hinge is almost the polar opposite of that. We’re trying to get you to spend less time on your phone and more time out in real life on dates. It’s interesting. When I started Hinge back in 2011, as venture capitalists looked at our business they asked those questions around engagement and retention. They were looking at social media, and they’re like, “What’s your daily over monthly? How much time are people spending in the app? How many sessions per day?” We were optimizing for those things, because that’s what VCs were asking about. That’s how we were raising money.
Then Hinge did a pretty big pivot in 2015, when I let go of half the company and we rebooted from scratch, because we felt as if we’d really lost our way. We’d become more of a piece of entertainment that was just about getting people more matches and more activity, and getting them back every day. We’d lost sight of what we were trying to do, which was to have people come to us to find a relationship. We weren’t really optimized around that anymore.
When we did that pivot in 2015, the biggest change we made was to stop focusing on the competition. We started focusing on the customer, and we made our North Star metric actual great dates. We introduced the “We Met” survey, where we asked people we suspected had gone on a date if they did in fact go on that date and whether it was good. Everything became oriented toward optimizing for that. That ended up creating a very, very different experience.
That actually became the primary differentiator of Hinge. A lot of the other apps in the industry were based on engagement and retention and just getting people back; they were more like entertainment platforms. Hinge became a utility. We started growing through word of mouth, and today we’re the fastest-growing, and in fact the only growing, major dating app. We grew 40 percent last year, while other dating apps are shrinking, because we built a very sustainable business model that delivers on value. The lifeblood of our company is getting more users out on dates, so they tell their friends and then their friends come and join Hinge.
The interesting thing about that business model is it’s in the tagline of the company. I always laugh when you all put out a press release, because it says, “Hinge, the app designed to be deleted,” and then a little trademark logo follows every time it’s mentioned, which is just very funny. I appreciate that you have to do it, but it just makes me laugh every time. That means you’re trying to graduate users. You’re a utility, you pay until you’re done, and then you’re out.
Yeah, precisely.
It means you constantly have to find new users. You basically have a different churn problem. How do you think about that life cycle?
We think about it in terms of good churn. We want people turning off the app for the right reason. We don’t want people turning off the app because they gave up too early or because they don’t like Hinge. We want people turning off the app because they found someone, ideally on Hinge.
What does it mean to find somebody on Hinge? Like you’re married? You’ve gone on three dates?
It’s different for different people. When we did the reboot, our core market was definitely 25- to 35-year-olds, and very much people who were, I would say, looking to find their person and get off the app. Now our fastest-growing segment has been 18- to 25-year-olds, and they’re at a different phase in their lives. It was pretty interesting. When we saw that segment starting to grow, it came as almost a surprise to us. I think what attracted these younger daters wasn’t so much a focus on finding a long-term relationship, or a marriage partner today; it was very much about the authenticity and vulnerability and intimacy they found on Hinge, and a moving away from platforms that felt very gamified and flat to something that felt very human and intentional and authentic.
So we think about our daters as having a journey mindset. They’re headed in a direction, they’re on a journey of self-exploration. They don’t want to waste their time on bad dates, but they aren’t necessarily looking for their marriage partner today, and that’s totally fine. We’re just looking to help people get off the app and out on great dates, and form intimate connections in real life.
But there’s a difference between getting off the app and going on great dates, and then deleting the entire thing, right?
Forever, yes.
There’s one exit ramp that is very different from another exit ramp. Not to keep comparing it to social media, but again, I feel as if I’m just viewing this from the outside, so it’s all metaphors for me. Mark Zuckerberg is terrified that young audiences will just abandon his core app, or whatever the core social media dynamic is at the time. This is why he bought Instagram. You can read his emails over the course of these trials. He’s like, “There’s another mechanic. I need to buy it before they overtake us.”
Zuckerberg keeps going down the line, whether that’s Stories or Reels or whatever the next thing is. You have the same problem, only you don’t get to keep the old users on the old mechanic. You don’t get to run Facebook and buy Instagram. How do you think about reinventing the app for that new, younger cohort that has different dynamics on the internet?
We always stay in tune with where the culture’s going. I think it’s just imperative, because, you’re right, we can’t rely on only a legacy user base. So we have to stay on top of culture and where it’s going, and then continually evolve the app accordingly. Right now, a big focus is on AI, and how we can increase the effectiveness of the app in a couple of different dimensions.
We’re actually finding, for example, the extent to which coaching has become really, really important right now. Especially during the pandemic, we saw social skills atrophy. People felt less comfortable meeting up with others in real life and interacting. So we’re helping people create their profiles, write their prompts, things like that. Another big thing that came out during the pandemic was more of a focus on voice, and adding voice prompts, which I think is, again, an example of our moving where the culture goes. So we’re always making these kinds of tweaks to continually keep the app fresh.
Do you feel the same existential pressure? There’s this idea that some cohort of people will delete the app — the old millennials will be married or tired or whatever it is they’re going to do, and you’ve got to go get a bunch of new Gen Z users or Gen Alpha users, which is frankly terrifying. How do you think about, “Okay, we’ve got to break the old model, because it’s existential for us if we don’t capture the younger user,” or is it more of a gradation?
If you look at the relatively brief history of this industry starting in the ‘90s, there’s only been one major disruption moment, which was around 2012. So you had the birth of the industry in the late ‘90s, where you had Match and eHarmony come on the scene, and then they dominated from 1996 to about 2014. It was actually a much smaller niche industry at the time. The users were older, people who felt as if they’d really struggled to find someone in real life.
Then you had the mobile dating apps come on because of a few different technologies that started to come online all together — one was mobile, one was the cultural change of everyone having a social media account. Another was data-processing power and moving away from the world of searching for people to a world of a feed of relevant people, one after another. That created a pretty big paradigm shift, where suddenly technology enabled an entirely new type of experience that it was hard for the old incumbents to mirror. They tried to pivot to mobile, but they couldn’t unseat themselves from their way of thinking about the world. It resembles a very classic disruption problem.
I think the next opportunity for that kind of disruption is going to be a big technology shift. We haven’t seen that up until very recently. Like with VR, AR, and other technologies like that, I just don’t see those working until they’re deeply adopted by 70 percent to 80 percent of the population, and that’s when I think it will really become something that people start using for dating. AI I think is a very different story, and it’s unclear at this point whether it becomes a disruptive force for the current players or whether it becomes more of an evolution. Obviously, Hinge has a tremendous amount of data we can use to train AI models. We’re seeing huge gains in our ability to match people up more thoughtfully given the tools, and at the same time we could introduce very new paradigms for dating.
I want to talk about AI with you, but you mentioned Match, so I think this is a good time to get to the Decoder questions. You’re part of Match Group. You sold to Match Group, and now Match Group owns all of the dating apps minus one, which is a little contentious. It doesn’t own Bumble. There’s a lawsuit. We can set that aside. What’s it like being part of Match Group? When you sold your company, what was that decision like for you?
Honestly, at the time we were in a tough position as a company. I’d done the reboot, and we were about a year into that reboot experience, and we had not really cracked the code yet. There were green shoots there that made me believe and made, I would say, the trained eye believe that there was really something there. But VCs just saw that we were popular, and then we tore down our business, and we restarted, and we started to rebuild again. There wasn’t a lot of juice there.
So we went with a strategy of recognizing the value of what we were seeing, including massive increases in effectiveness, women coming to the platform in a much higher proportion than on other dating apps. So that was very interesting to Match. And so we received a strategic investment from the company in 2017, and that gave it a path to buy the rest of the company, which it did at the end of 2018.
What’s that structure like inside of Match Group now?
It’s evolving. There’s a brand-new CEO, Spencer Rascoff, who just started, and I think he’s taking a fresh look at some of that. But up until recently, and still today, the company operates pretty independently. We’re in New York. We pretty much have our own space. We have our own product teams, our own engineering teams, our own marketing teams that operate very independently. We share learnings across the platform. We use shared services like accounting and legal and things like that. But for the most part, the company has its own independent culture, its own independent mission, product road maps, marketing strategies, all of that.
You said you shared some central services, like accounting and finance. Is there any product or data that you’re sharing?
We certainly share learnings. Especially on things that we don’t really want to compete on, such as safety or monetization or things like that. So there’s certainly that, and there’s sharing for safety purposes. Those are the main ways we share.
So if you’re a young and carefree single on Tinder, and you graduate to Hinge, you don’t get to just bring your data along for the ride?
[Laughs] No.
Again, I’m just looking from the outside. Tinder is interesting. The CEO of Tinder just stepped down. Your new CEO at Match, Spencer, stepped in to run Tinder for a minute. In any normal circumstance, you would be on the attack. If Tinder wasn’t part of the same company as you, this would be a moment to say, “Okay, there’s some strategic weakness over there. We’re going to go get them. We’re going to put the screws on.” Are you allowed to do that inside Match Group?
So first of all, I’ll just say that we don’t really think too much about Tinder as Hinge’s competition. We think about Tinder in a very different psychographic mindset. You come to Hinge because you want to really take your time, be intentional, be thoughtful, find your person. Tinder has a much more casual, younger, “anything can happen” mentality. And so that was a very intentional portfolio strategy decision that Match made back when it acquired us. So no, we don’t think about it like that.
That’s why I asked about the data and the lifecycle question. There’s a time in your life where you might use Tinder, there’s a time in your life where you might use Hinge. It seems from the overall umbrella company perspective, you want to move that user around your family of apps, but it doesn’t seem as if that’s actually happening at the top level.
Yes. From the outside that would make sense. It’s a bit nuanced, because there are very different brand reputations. We like to think of Hinge pretty independently, and I think so do our users.
So there’s no pop-up on Tinder that’s like, “Maybe, it’s time to cool it and download Hinge”?
There’s not.
[Laughs] Okay, feature request for you. What’s your org chart like? How is Hinge structured?
That’s also been evolving over time, and we’re still a relatively small company. We have about 350 employees. If I think about the evolution of Hinge growing from one person to the first 100 to 150 people, originally, it was very centrally run. There was tight coordination. A lot of direction came directly from me and my executive team. Then as we started to grow beyond 100 people, I would say a lot of the technology was relatively stable. Like with social, mobile, big data, the question became, “How do we keep optimizing and iterating around this?”
We became a pretty decentralized organization, where we had principles around pushing decision-making down to the lowest levels possible, keeping it really on the front lines. We had pretty independent cross-functional product teams that would work on their individual little missions or surfaces. We oscillated back and forth between that.
People felt they had a lot of autonomy. That was the main ethos of the company. And then I think with AI over the last couple of years, we felt like, “Whoa, we really need to make a pretty big shift.” Like I said, the risk of disruption is high, with very big opportunities to shift the product experience in a new direction. It now requires pulling decision-making back in toward the center a bit, and giving a much clearer strategic direction to the team, so that we’re all working in concert toward one thing. Because the whole app really has to move together. Different parts of the app have to talk to each other in ways that when we weren’t going through much change, wasn’t as essential. That said, we still have very highly cross-functional product teams where product managers sit with a dedicated designer, researcher, data scientist, and tech lead to attack very mission-oriented problems.
You mentioned “surfaces” and “missions.” Are those expressed as just the tabs at the bottom of the app? Is that how they’re broken down, or are they actual user journey missions?
That’s what I mean — surfaces versus missions. I think we’ve gone in different directions. There’s never really a clear line of one versus the other. Do you own the Discover tab, where users just discover new people, or is your job to help people find the right person? In that case, you have to think more cohesively about operating across different surfaces or parts of the app. Now we think about our teams operating less as individual surface units and more as part of a cohesive dating-outcomes team, where people feel a bit more flexible moving around to different surfaces.
How do you think about assigning product managers to those teams? Because PMs, at least in my experience, are like, “I own this square, and I will mess with this square to make this number go up as much as I can.” But “I can mess with all the squares” is really hard, right?
Yes, that’s why we have strong directors at the VP level who oversee an overall mission the way that a head of dating outcomes or a head of growth, who’s coordinating a set of product managers, would. And again, we ask our PMs. Their primary identity is as a dating outcomes PM, not as a discover PM, or a profile PM, or something like that. And while day to day most of their work may focus on the profile and identity work, they see themselves as very much operating as part of this team.
That feels like something you evolved to. You’re a relatively young founder. I think you founded the company right out of Harvard Business School. How has your decision-making framework evolved? How do you make decisions?
That’s also hugely evolved. Everything I’ve learned, I’ve learned through doing it all the wrong ways first and then eventually getting to the right way. When you’re a founder and you have a small team of 10, 20, or 30 people, you’re just making decisions by the seat of your pants. What feels good? What feels right? You’re just using your own gut.
As we started to get toward 100 people or so, what I noticed was I would be making different decisions on different days that weren’t always consistent. They were based on my mood that day or whatever data was in front of me or what I had last read or whatever. I was just finding I was getting pretty inconsistent. So what I started trying to do was to write down my whole management algorithm. I started putting it in a Google Doc, like “Here’s how I make decisions, here’s what I believe is true.” I started publishing that to the whole company, so everyone could just read it. We would be just very transparent about how we made decisions.
It was around the time that I think I read Ray Dalio’s book Principles, and got super dialed in on how we make decisions. What are our principles, and what do we believe is true? Then I opened it up so everyone could comment on it. We would have long debates in the comment margins of a Google Doc to consider everything from our product-strategy principles to whether Hinge should have a dress code. Literally anything. It was all just there so that everyone could debate it.
We had hundreds of principles, and then as the company got even bigger and we got to 300 or 400 people, it was very hard. One, you just can’t have these endless debates in Google Docs anymore. Also, the principles started to stabilize. There wasn’t as much debate and churn anymore, and then it actually became an exercise in distilling down the most essential things to communicate about our culture.
I worked a couple of years ago to write an internal book called How We Do Things, which distilled it all down to four or five principles. For example, what are the most fundamental things to understand about how we make decisions here? And then individual teams and individual projects would then write their own principles that were more specific to what they were doing at any given time.
One of our meta principles now is “decide with principles,” meaning that we don’t want decisions getting made based on some random person’s opinion that if tomorrow this person leaves the company and we hire someone else, they’re going to come in with a completely different set of ideas about how to do something. We really try to define our principles first, agree on those principles, and then see how our work maps to them. I’m happy to talk about what the other three principles are if you want, but that’s the framework we use to make decisions now.
Yeah, talk about them a little bit. There’s a beautiful website, we’ll link to it. It has storytelling, it’s well done. But tell people what the other three principles are.
So the next one is “love the problem.” What I would notice is we would get an inclination around a user problem, which maybe was not even validated 100 percent. Then we’d start getting feature ideas, and we’d get very attached to a feature, and sometimes the feature would drift and not even be solving the original problem. What I found was, if you want to build breakthrough innovative product features and products, you have to spend extra time with the problem to really understand the why behind the why behind the why of of it. You need to ask, “What’s really going on here? Can we really get deep into our users, into the data, into our users’ experiences?” You have to go to that level to get insight that just isn’t available on the surface, and then stay really committed to that problem. And that’s what, again, allows for innovation.
I think for a lot of Silicon Valley, the strategy is just to throw feature ideas against a wall and see what sticks: “Let’s see if this works. Oh, it doesn’t work, throw that out, let’s try something else.” When you have a lot of deep conviction around a user problem, and you really know you want to solve it, then you have the resilience to try and try again to solve that problem, even if your first or second iteration doesn’t make it. So one of the most foundational of our principles is, “love the problem.” Fall in love with the problem, don’t fall in love with the solution, as you must be willing to give up the solution at any given time if it’s not solving the core problem that you’re trying to solve. So that is “love the problem.”
Next is “keep it simple,” meaning that I think the best solutions are always the most elegant solutions. Overall, we want to keep the product very simplified and minimal. Our colors are black and white. If you look at the Hinge product today, it’s very clean, it’s very simple. We’re always stripping away features that don’t make sense and just recognizing that there’s complexity.
There’s a cost to complexity every time you add a feature. So even if you add a feature, if it’s only marginally beneficial, the cost of the complexity and maintaining that feature versus the marginal benefit it adds will end up gunking up the app over time and slowing you down over time. That’s a hard conversation to have with product managers, because they’ll work for months on a feature and they’ll ship it and say, “Yeah, it didn’t harm the user base, we like it, and it even moved this metric over here by 2 percent.” And you’re like, “Well, the cost of complexity is high, and so we need to focus on things that are actually going to have a major impact.”
Are you all the way two features out for every feature in? Do you think about it that way? I know some founders do.
I haven’t heard that before. I don’t necessarily think that way. But I do believe in constantly reevaluating what’s in the app, asking what needs to stay, and having a high bar for building a new feature. So does it actually accomplish what we need it to accomplish, and is the complexity worth the cost? So that’s the third one now.
The fourth, the last one, is “tend to trust.” I just find that trust is the lifeblood of an organization. You have to do a lot of work to proactively cultivate and tend to trust by creating strong interpersonal relationships, by creating lots of opportunities for transparency at the organization. We have always been very, very transparent about where the organization is headed. So much so that we had to make all Hinge employees Match Group insiders so they couldn’t trade Match Group stock except during trading windows, because we would be so transparent about where we were, what our financial position was.
Everyone should know that all the way down to any position at the company. I think the trust that you create both interpersonally and from the leadership on down to the rest of the organization is absolutely essential. It just saves you a lot of headaches when it comes to internal politics and all those types of things.
Let’s put this into practice. You obviously made a big decision to refocus on AI. How did that come about? Did you wake up one day and say, “Oh boy, it’s happening”? Was it that Match Group put out a press release with OpenAI saying, “We’re going to work together”? Did you read that and say, “I got to figure this out”? How did this come about?
Certainly the release of whatever version of ChatGPT that sent shockwaves through the world was a pretty big wake-up call. Obviously, we’d already been using machine learning and things like that in the interest of safety, and in our algorithms, our recommendation algorithms. But I think the shot across the bow that came from the release of ChatGPT [with GPT-3.5] was what really woke us up to the potential capabilities here and to realizing that this could be a major disruptive force in a way that we hadn’t really seen since we started Hinge.
It took a bit for us to get our strategy clear about what our thesis was on how this was going to affect matching and dating in the future. It wasn’t immediately apparent, but I think we have a pretty clear thesis now, and we’ve started to organize the company around that thesis.
What’s the thesis?
That there’s two main vectors that AI is going to impact: dating and matchmaking. I think the big story is AI is going to move Hinge much closer to the experience of working with a personalized matchmaking service, and away from the experience of feeling that you are joining a social platform on your own as you try to find your person.
So what does that mean? Two big pieces. One is personalized matching, and the other is effective coaching. On the personalized matching front, we should be able to move much further beyond the world we are in today, which is our users speaking to us in essentially Morse code as they try to communicate to us what they like and what they don’t like.
The idea is that they would be able to speak much more directly to us with “here’s what I’m looking for, here are my values, here’s my personality, here are my interests.” It means Hinge being able to listen to them and hear their preferences, and even integrate things like relationship science into the app to better understand what types of people are compatible and what types of people are not long-term compatible, and introduce them to a much more curated, higher-quality, less-quantity list of people, where they have much more trust that if you’re introducing them to this person, this is probably someone they want to go out with.
We’ve already seen big gains, by the way, just by using the power of LLMs to drive more of our recommendation systems using the data we already have. But we released a new algorithm a couple of months ago that increased matches and dates by like 15 percent, and that’s just using the same data. But now we can start to use much more of that unstructured, nuanced data, with people talking to us in their own voice about who they are and what they want, which we can use very effectively.
So that’s the whole personalized matching front. Then there’s the effective coaching front. A lot of our users struggle to get out on that first date, and they often don’t know why. I have friends who are incredible people, and they’ll ask me to take a look at their Hinge profile. I’m flabbergasted that this is their attempt at putting themselves out there.
So we’re starting with pretty basic things. Hinge has these prompts, which are short questions designed to get you into a conversation, and you put them on your profile. A lot of people write great responses to prompts, but a lot of people write not-so-great responses, often just one-word answers that just don’t work. We found it’s just incredibly effective to have trained an AI model on good-prompt responses and give people feedback. And it’s mostly like, “Can you say more about that?”
[Laughs] Don’t just put “no.”
Yeah, and to be a little bit more specific and tell a little bit of the story. Good answers invite another question back, or get a conversation going. So we can give people those nudges so they write good prompts, so that they choose good photos. We have a team called Hinge Labs, which is always looking at why some people succeed, and why some people don’t on the app.
Some of it is, again, simply building product features that help solve those problems, but another part of it is just giving guidance and notes about how they can be using the product better. We have traditionally published those in date reports, and we publish them in the press and we place them in the help center. But for the most part people just don’t read them. But the idea that we can take this body of knowledge we have about how to succeed on Hinge, and then look at how our users are using Hinge, and then deliver the right piece of advice at the right time to the right user, I think is going to be pretty transformative for a lot of people.
There’s a pretty fine line between that and what I see lots of people already doing all day long, which is just talking to ChatGPT, just hanging out. We had Eugenia Kuyda, the CEO of Replika, on the show, and she said, essentially, “My plan is people are going to date AI bots that will coach them up into being fully formed people, then we’ll release them into the dating pool, and they will have confidence and self-assuredness.”
Again, there’s a fine line between prompting someone and coaching them inside Hinge, and we’re coaching them in a different way within a more self-contained ecosystem. How do you think about that? Would you launch a full-on virtual girlfriend inside Hinge?
Certainly not. I have lots of thoughts about this. I think there’s actually quite a clear line between providing a tool that helps people do something or get better at something, and the line where it becomes this thing that is trying to become your friend, trying to mimic emotions, and trying to create an emotional connection with you. That I think is really playing with fire.
I think we are already in a crisis of loneliness, and a loneliness epidemic. It’s a complex issue, and it’s baked into our culture, and it goes back to before the internet. But just since 2000, over the past 20 years, the amount of time that people spend together in real life with their friends has dropped by 70 percent for young people. And it’s been almost completely displaced by the time spent staring at screens. As a result, we’ve seen massive increases in mental health issues, and people’s loneliness, anxiety, and depression.
I think Mark Zuckerberg was just quoted about this, that most people don’t have enough friends. But he said we’re going to give them AI chatbots. That he believes that AI chatbots can become your friends. I think that’s honestly an extraordinarily reductive view of what a friendship is, that it’s someone there to say all the right things to you at the right moment
The most rewarding parts of being in a friendship are being able to be there for someone else, to risk and be vulnerable, to share experiences with other conscious entities. So I think that while it will feel good in the moment, like junk food basically, to have an experience with someone who says all the right things and is available at the right time, it will ultimately, just like junk food, make people feel less healthy and mo re drained over time. It will displace the human relationships that people should be cultivating out in the real world.
How do you compete with that? That is the other thing that is happening. It is happening. Whether it’s good or bad. Hinge is offering a harder path. So you say, “We’ve got to get people out on dates.” I honestly wonder about that, based on the younger folks I know who sometimes say, “I just don’t want to leave the house. I would rather just talk to this computer. I have too much social pressure just leaving the house in this way.” That’s what Hinge is promising to do. How do you compete with that? Do you take it head on? Are you marketing that directly?
I’m starting to think very much about taking it head on. We want to continue at Hinge to champion human relationships, real human-to-human-in-real-life relationships, because I think they are an essential part of the human experience, and they’re essential to our mental health. It’s not just because I run a dating app and, obviously, it’s important that people continue to meet. It really is a deep, personal mission of mine, and I think it’s absolutely critical that someone is out there championing this. Because it’s always easier to race to the bottom of the brain stem and offer people junk products that maybe sell in the moment but leave them worse off. That’s the entire model that we’ve seen from what happened with social media. I think AI chatbots could frankly be much more dangerous in that respect.
So what we can do is to become more and more effective and support people more and more, and make it as easy as possible to do the harder and riskier thing, which is to go out and form real relationships with real people. They can let you down and might not always be there for you, but it is ultimately a much more nourishing and enriching experience for people. We can also champion and raise awareness as much as we can. That’s another reason why I’m here today talking with you, because I think it’s important to put out the counter perspective, that we don’t just reflexively believe that AI chatbots can be your friend, without thinking too deeply about what that really implies and what that really means.
We keep going back to junk food, but people had to start waking up to the fact that this was harmful. We had to do a lot of campaigns to educate people that drinking Coca-Cola and eating fast food was detrimental to their health over the long term. And then as people became more aware of that, a whole personal wellness industry started to grow, and now that’s a huge industry, and people spend a lot of time focusing on their diet and nutrition and mental health, and all these other things. I think similarly, social wellness needs to become a category like that. It’s thinking about not just how do I get this junk social experience of social media where I get fed outraged news and celebrity gossip and all that stuff, but how do I start building a sense of social wellness, where I can create an enriching, intimate connection with important people in my life.
The connection between the wellness industry and the rise of social media is a whole other podcast, and maybe a PhD thesis, too. There’s a whole lot there to unpack. I take your point though, that maybe using our phones in healthier ways is the future. It will make us better, and that will be a reaction to the negativity we see from phones today.
Literally as we speak, I’m sure Elon Musk and Donald Trump are continuing to tweet at each other in an unhealthy way for maybe the future of the entire planet. But you’ve got to use AI today. You have prompt feedback running in the app today. You’re helping people pick better photos. The flip side of that is that they might just use AI to generate the content. Can you detect it if your prompt feedback says, “Hey, that’s not a good answer,” and someone runs away to Gemini or ChatGPT and comes up with a better answer that doesn’t actually reflect them?
I think about this like the extreme photo filters, which used to be popular on Instagram back in the day. Ultimately, you are going to have to go meet up with this person on a real date, and so you want to come across as best as you can, because, obviously, you’re not going to bring ChatGPT on your date with you.
I’m worried about this. I want to say that I’m worried about this.
So it’s not a winning strategy. That said, do people ask for advice and little tweaks? They already do it today. They ask their friends, “How should I respond to this text message?” So in some sense, I don’t see it that differently, because you will have to meet up with this person eventually and show up as the real you.
Would you add that feedback inside Hinge? Hinge obviously has messaging features. Are you going to add a little coach into the messaging feature to say, “Hey, don’t be a dick”?
That already exists. It’s called “Are You Sure?” That’s AI-driven to make sure people don’t send inappropriate messages. But yeah, again, the right nudge at the right time, because I think if we build the right tools within Hinge that are appropriate for dating, people will then use it and be less likely to run out to ChatGPT and use [the feedback] in ways that are probably less appropriate.
Nudging people to say, “Hey, you guys have been chatting for a bit. Did you know that most people, after they exchange this many messages, usually just go on and move to a date?” Or, “Hey, it seems like the conversation has died. Here’s something interesting that you may not have noticed on their profile that you can ask about.” Little things like that, certainly.
One of the interesting dynamics here is you’ll add more and more AI to the digital experience people have with each other to make them perform better or act better or be more interesting, whatever it is. And then they’ll go on a date, and then they might leave your platform.
They might switch to iMessage or call each other on the phone. I don’t think Gen Z is calling each other. They’ll do something else. They’ll go on Discord. How do you bring that experience along for the ride to say, “We’re going to continue to stay here and help mediate and coach you through this relationship”?
We’re not there yet. We still have a lot of work to do just to get people out on the first date. And at the same time, I do think there’s actually a lot of opportunity to help coach people through that experience. How to show up on a first date. What to talk about on a first date. How to build intimacy over time, how to ask about the right things to determine compatibility. So I think there are definitely opportunities for that. It’s not on the 2025 road map, but it’s certainly something I’m thinking about.
Do you worry that people are going to just upload full AI avatars on Hinge and catfish each other to death?
We have a very robust trust and safety team that is thinking two to three steps ahead about how to mitigate things like that.
I have spent too much time talking about watermarks in AI and SynthID, and there’s lots of episodes of the show that are deep in the AI watermarks game, and it has effectively come to nothing so far. There’s just a lot of problems there. Are you able to say, “Okay, we can detect a full AI photo here”?
There’s so many signals when it comes to creating a dating profile from the phone number you use and the email you use and your IP address, all those things like that, that we have a very multifaceted way of determining the authenticity of profiles. I’ll say that.
Running these models is costly. There’s lots and lots of different kinds of models you can run at different costs. Are you using lots of models? Are you sending everything to GPT-4? How does this work for you?
We use different models for different things. Sometimes we build them completely internally. As you said, it’s public that we have a relationship with OpenAI. So we use different things and are always balancing cost and performance against our ability to build in-house versus not.
Do you see that trend shifting over time? I’m very curious about what the frontier models can do versus what the cheaper, more efficient models can do. Have you seen that shift over time as you’ve started to deploy these tools?
For one, we’ve seen the cost of the frontier models just decline precipitously, which is pretty interesting to watch. But I’ll say that there are models, even the prompt feedback model, that are very, very specific and discrete, and that we can mostly build internally to understand.
Do you run that in your cloud and your data center? Or are you running that on people’s phones?
I don’t actually know. I think that’s in the cloud. I’m almost positive that one is in the cloud.
The reason I’m asking is that to do any of this well, you need more and more data from people, and you’re asking them to generate more and more data. For instance, “That’s not a good answer; tell me more about yourself,” is more data and it’s data that you’re now storing. In particular, it’s data about gender, sexuality, and dating preferences — that’s stuff the government suddenly has a very unusual and somewhat threatening interest in.
Are you worried about that? That the Trump administration or some future administration would show up and say, “Tell me all of the transgender people on your platform”?
Obviously, we have very, very sensitive data that we have very, very clear protections around. And we haven’t seen anything like that.
So you haven’t had any of those incoming requests yet?
No.
The Trump administration has also said it’s going to start scanning social media profiles for references to Palestine, and for comments about Trump himself. When you talk about matching people and values, those things come up. Has there been any request for Hinge profiles from the Department of Homeland Security or ICE or any of these other parts of the Trump administration that are doing this social media scanning?
No.
The reason I’m asking is the amount of data you might collect is very, very personal. It seems like a rich target. Have you thought about the planning for how big of a target this might become as you prompt people to input more and more data with AI?
Certainly. I think we’ll have to handle those things as they come. We’re obviously in a very uncertain time right now, but I will say that we are primarily a platform about creating intimate one-to-one connections where people should be able to express themselves in the way they see fit, and describe themselves and their own sexuality and their own gender in the way they need to do. That will inevitably touch on people’s very private lives.
I view that as absolutely sacred and fundamental to our mission, and people feeling safe to express themselves is absolutely critical. So those would be our very highest priorities, and I imagine not top priority for social media, where people are blasting posts to thousands, or millions, of people. Our platform is not about one-to-many posting and conversation. It’s about intimate one-to-one connection and one-to-one conversations.
I think I would warn you that having a data pool of that kind might make you a target. I’m curious how that plays out over time, particularly in this administration. There’s some platform dynamics here as well, like iOS and Android exist. They are platforms. They’re also themselves rich targets for the government.
Overall, there’s a push for the platforms to do age verification themselves. There’s laws now in certain states, and in other countries, that the Apples and the Googles of the world have pushed back against in various ways. Do you think they need to do it? Do you think that it’s at the iOS and Android level that you need to do the age verification? Because this is a core component of bringing people onto Hinge. It’s not for children.
It’s certainly not. We’re 18-plus and we have our own age verification methods. But yeah, we have been pushing for these platforms to do age verification themselves because they have even more robust ways to do it.
The arguments in response — when you listen to Apple and Google push back against these laws — is that it would be too hard. It would create a censorship regime, that the app vendors need to be liable for this. Have you seen any movement in that dynamic? I think at the highest level, this is one of the big dynamics of how we might regulate platforms in the future.
I am staying much closer to product development and where we’re going with AI right now than I am to that.
Your monetization method is obviously a premium version of Hinge. I think one tier is $55 a month. There’s another tier that’s $45 a month. The big news in the platform world is that Apple is no longer allowed to prevent alternative payment systems. Match Group, in particular, has been leading this fight. It’s in all the press releases. Has that changed the dynamics of Hinge for you?
I don’t know if it changes the dynamics, but it’s certainly going to give us more flexibility in giving users options to be able to pay in different ways. I think that’s good for everybody for sure.
Have you launched an alternative payment service yet?
We have not.
Would you like to?
Yes.
How soon?
Certainly by the end of the year.
Is that going to be a Match Group payment service or a Hinge payment service? How do you think about that?
These are things that we’re figuring out, but most likely Hinge.
That would return somewhere on the order of 15 percent to 30 percent depending on how the billing works for you at your scale and recurring subscriptions and all that. Is that just going to be pure margin? You’re just going to get the money back?
Well, I think it changes the equation on many fronts. It allows us to invest more in the company. It changes how we would price, so no, I think it could result in lower prices. It could result in more investment in the company, or it could result in more margin. It’s probably some combination of all three of those.
Match Group has been doing this fight for a long time, and you’re already describing how you might change pricing or the lifetime value of customers. Fortnite maker Epic Games fought this fight for five years. At the very end, the judge says, “I’m very mad at you, Apple. You can’t do this anymore.” Did you immediately start making plans that day or were you like, “This is going to get appealed, we have to wait”?
There’s been back and forth and appeals and stays and things like that. I think just a couple of days ago, the appeal was denied. So I think that made it pretty real.
Just to put the decision-making into practice, did you say that day we need an alternative payment system?
Certainly the day that the original ruling came out, we started to plan.
What does that planning look like? Is it, “I’m going to call Stripe”? Put us in your shoes. That happens. Someone comes to you and you say, “Okay. We need to start to plan.” Walk us through that moment.
Just like anything else at Hinge, I think that we stay grounded in our principles. We look at the big picture. We look at the teams and the road maps and the things they’re focused on right now, and we think, “Does this new information change anything? And as we look at our growth team, does it make sense to build the next monetization or expansion feature? Does it make sense to pivot resources over to this thing?” And given, as you said, the 15 percent to 30 percent gain that’s on the table, it’s a pretty high priority.
There’s an ecosystem of companies that might be building this stuff more centrally, that might be charging different rates. I’m excited about that. It’s wonky and boring. There’s a reason we’re ending the episode on payment systems.
A whole new industry I think will emerge. Well maybe not an industry, but certainly a suite of services will emerge around this to allow people to manage subscription payments, cancellations. It’s certainly nuanced.
But at the end of that, what you want is rates to come down. Where do you think the rates should be? I know no one has ever thought they should be at 15 percent or 30 percent. Where do you think they should be with a little more market competition?
When you stack the credit card payment processing fees on top of the fees around customer service and all the nuance of managing those, I do think it comes down to the 5 percent to 10 percent range.
When you think about recovering that up to 20 percent, are you thinking, “Okay, I can use this to lower prices and grow,” or is it that you have to build many, many more AI features to compete against the coming onslaught of AI chatbots?
[Laughs] I think we’re very, very focused on innovating for the future. Like I said, it changes the equation, so it’s on all three fronts. It’s lower prices, it’s higher margin, and it’s more investment in the company. But it certainly gives us major opportunities to invest in the core product experience at a time when there’s massive disruption. So it’s a particularly critical time to be doing that.
There’s a lot of talk about platform shifts. You’ve talked about platform shifts here. People might be using Hinge differently, because they have AI tools or because the AI tools are helping them find one another more efficiently, or better. A lot of the platform shift I hear about is, “Oh, we’re going to have new devices. We’re going to have new form factors. People are just going to talk to ChatGPT in the bar.”
Maybe we’ll just have agents that represent us, and they’ll go on dates for a while, and come back and say, “You should go on this date with this other person we found on Hinge,” because the agents have fallen in love, and now you just have to not screw it up. That takes the screen away. That takes your surfaces and your missions and puts them in a totally different place. How are you thinking about that level of shift? Is it even on your radar?
Yeah, I’m thinking about it right now. I think we overuse the form factor of our mobile devices right now for all kinds of things that it doesn’t need to be used for. I think a lot of those will be siphoned off into some other form factor. I especially think audio and voice is going to be a very big piece of it. But I don’t think that means that the form factor completely goes away. There are things that you need visual cues and references for where a screen is still going to be the dominant form factor. At least a piece of the dating equation is going to be that, for sure.
Do you think we’ll get to a place where people’s agents are just dating each other and then reporting back?
No, I don’t really think so. I think there are much better–
Isn’t that what’s already happening in the matchmaking algorithm, in a very reductive way? Isn’t that what’s going on?
I think in a very abstractive, reductive way, you could say that. But that’s not really what’s happening. We are not simulating dates. I think it’s a very expensive and inefficient way to do something that is actually much more straightforward.
There’s just a part of me that says you’re going to have some competitor that attempts this, and we will all have to contend with it.
I just think that’s a bit of a red herring for trying to map someone’s psyche and guess how they’re going to act. That adds a lot of complexity when actually you can just talk to people very directly about who they are and what they’re looking for and what matters to them, and compare that against someone else and what they describe, and actually make a lot of good connections and [get a] clear understanding in figuring out who should match with whom.
Justin, this has been great. Tell people what’s next for Hinge. What should they be looking for?
It really is the evolution of the product. I think that the shift to AI is going to be bigger than the shift to mobile for the industry. If you think about the big picture of what mobile did, it just made the process more approachable, faster, more fun, easier. But it was still the same fundamental experience of just cruising for people and trying to find someone based on very limited information, matching with them, trying to figure it out, going on a date, realizing this is not your person, trying to find the next date.
We’re moving much closer to a world of really deep understanding of compatibility. Being able to zero in on the right person very quickly. It’s going to be a very transformative experience that I think is going to very much change people’s understanding and perception of the industry. So I’m really looking forward to the next couple of years, because I think that we will see more change than we’ve ever seen in the industry before.
We’ll have to have you back to check in on how it’s going. Thanks so much for coming on Decoder.
Great. Thank you.
Questions or comments about this episode? Hit us up at decoder@theverge.com. We really do read every email!
]]>Conference season is underway, and today we’re live at Apple Park in Cupertino, California, for this year’s WWDC. While we got a glimpse of the Vision Pro in 2023 and a preview of Apple Intelligence in 2024, this year is a bit of a wild card.
Rumor has it that instead of flashy hardware or AI, Apple is giving all its software a makeover. That reportedly includes a glassier aesthetic for iOS, iPadOS, macOS, watchOS, and tvOS. The company is also rumored to be renaming all its operating systems to be more consistent. So instead of iOS 19, visionOS 2, and watchOS 12, we’d be getting iOS 26, visionOS 26, and watchOS 26. Oh, there’s possibly a new gaming app on deck, too.
The pressure is on for Apple right now. Google I/O just wrapped up, which was an AI bonanza complete with demos of the Android XR prototype smart glasses. Apple Intelligence’s rollout hasn’t been quite as smooth as Apple probably envisioned. The all-new Siri is nowhere to be seen, and it seems even Apple is not entirely clear when it’ll arrive. (Though, spokesperson Jacqueline Roy recently told Daring Fireball that the company still anticipates it’ll roll out “in the coming year.”) We’re not expecting big surprises on this front, but don’t rule out a potential update or two on how things are going.
The WWDC 2025 keynote kicks off at 10AM PT / 1PM ET. Watch and follow along with our liveblog to get the latest minute-by-minute updates.
]]>Today, I’m talking with Taskrabbit CEO Ania Smith. Taskrabbit is one of the original gig worker platforms that’s really focused on work you might need done in your home; it’s been around for nearly 20 years, and you might be surprised to know that the core product has not changed all that much. Taskers can sign up to offer services like assembling furniture, mounting TVs, and helping people move, and they get to set their own prices for that work, which makes it a more of a marketplace than something like Uber.
As you’ll hear Ania say, the difference between Taskrabbit and something like Thumbtack or Angi is that Taskrabbit manages the entire interaction from end to end — it’s not just a directory but also where people can leave reviews, get customer service, and manage all their payments.
Listen to Decoder, a show hosted by The Verge’s Nilay Patel about big ideas — and other problems. Subscribe here!
Ania describes all this as matching supply and demand, and we talked a lot about where that supply of labor comes from and what it might mean that there are more Taskers than ever right now. That feels like a bit of a recession indicator to me — that’s a lot of people looking for additional income — but Ania had a more measured view and pointed out that there are some Taskers earning a very comfortable living on the platform.
Taskrabbit is also now notably owned by Ikea, which has a lot of interest in how the platform grows and what kinds of services it can integrate into the experience of being an Ikea customer. Assembling Ikea furniture is a core Taskrabbit service, after all, and I wanted to know if there was any pressure to specialize that service or prioritize Ikea work over other companies.
But if you’ve been listening to Decoder recently, you know that the heart of this conversation was about the next wave of user interfaces — particularly, the next wave of AI assistants that can book services like Taskrabbit, DoorDash, Uber for you. Google actually gave a demo of one of its agents going through Taskrabbit’s website a couple weeks ago, and I’m very curious how all these services are thinking about having those kinds of tools step in between them and their customers.
After all, if you’re just asking a voice assistant to get someone to help you mount a TV, you’re probably not using the Taskrabbit website yourself. That’s a big change, and Ania and I talked about it for a while — you’ll hear her say Taskrabbit’s end-to-end focus is the differentiator here and that other platforms will find it hard to compete with that.
Okay: Taskrabbit CEO Ania Smith. Here we go.
This interview has been lightly edited for length and clarity.
Ania Smith, you are the CEO of Taskrabbit. Welcome to Decoder.
Thank you for having me. Excited to be here.
I’m very excited to talk to you. It feels like there’s a lot of change coming to the service economy on our phones. There’s a lot of change in the economy in general that is interesting to talk about. Let’s start at the very beginning. TaskRabbit has been around for a while. You’ve been the CEO for about five years. How would you describe Taskrabbit today? How should people think about it?
So it’s pretty similar to what it has been. We connect people who need help around the home with a vast network of highly skilled and reliable Taskers who can help you with cleaning, mounting your TV, assembling your furniture, or a range of other tasks around the home. And I think we do that pretty well.
Taskrabbit was founded in 2008. Many things have happened since then. We’ve gone from a desktop paradigm to a mobile paradigm. Competitors have shown up. There’s Fiverr, which I think of as where you go to get a cheap logo. Do you think of Taskrabbit as expansive into digital services? You’re describing hanging TVs. Is it more of a physical services platform?
Today it is, and that’s really our focus. It is our vision to become the number one marketplace for home services specifically. There’s a lot of things to get done around the home, everything from putting down mulch and cleaning your gutters to mowing your lawn. Then there’s so much to do inside the home.
There’s also a lot to do with big moments in your life, when you think about starting a family or moving. Moving is a perfect example. You have to clean your old place, clean the new place, pack, unpack, find an actual moving service, mount TVs, assemble. So, there are a lot of use cases where these services are still very much needed.
One thing that’s interesting about that market in particular is that there’s no shortage of gardening companies, moving companies, or people on Craigslist who will hang your TV for you. There are AV installation companies at the high end. Do you want the companies who are doing customer discovery on the platform or do you want individuals?
Today we definitely focus on individuals. We’re getting to a point where half of workers in the US are actually gig economy workers. That means many things, right? Not all of them are doing furniture assembly, but many are using these platforms to find additional work and to have the flexibility to transition between different stages of life. That’s what we focus on, and those are the people who we want to help.
We’re here to provide a meaningful income to folks who need it. There are a lot of people who may be between jobs or students who have time on weekends or during the summers, and there’s a lot of opportunity to make a pretty good living on Taskrabbit. An average hourly pay is close to $50 an hour, and in some markets, it’s well over $50. So, there are a lot of great opportunities to make a meaningful income for yourself and your family.
When you say meaningful income at $50 per hour, that’s not a full-time work week at $50 an hour, right? That’s piecework. How much are people making on the high end on Taskrabbit?
We have people making well over $200,000 a year. It’s been a couple years now, but there was a Tasker I spoke with who was a student at NYU. One of his friends was moving and using Taskrabbit. He had never heard of Taskrabbit, so he looked it up. This was 2022 or 2023, and he said, “Hey, maybe I can do this while I look for a job.”
So, he got smart and figured out how to mount TVs fairly quickly just by learning it on YouTube and really optimized his jobs. He could sometimes mount as many as three TVs in an hour in Manhattan. This is all he did for his first year after graduation, and he made well over $200,000 a year.
Is that sustainable? I know a lot of people in the industry who have AV installation companies, for example. They go from that to “I’m going to design you a home theater system” to “I’m going to sell you the components of that at some high margin.” That’s how you build your business. But that’s different from “I’m going to install a lot of TVs every single day for the rest of my life.” Is something like that totally sustainable on Taskrabbit?
No, but how many people have the same job for the rest of their lives? We have Taskers who’ve been here for five, six, or 10 years, which is great. Sometimes they leave, they come back, and they leave again. It just really depends on what’s going on in their lives. We want to make sure that we provide the opportunity. If people do want to come and earn an income, we’re here to help them do that. For us, that means getting as many jobs as possible so that we can make sure our Taskers have jobs that they can do.
So, $200,000 is the high end. It’s a great, shiny number. What’s the median?
I don’t think that I know the median. It really depends on the market. There’s obviously liquidity and density questions, and it also depends on the category. Many of our Taskers are not working what you would consider full time. They are doing this as a stop measure in between gigs or just in the evenings. So, we don’t really track the median earnings because everyone has such a specific and different use case. What we think about is what are your weekly targets for earning if you want to work as much as possible in a week,and how can we help you reach those targets? We find that that’s what Taskers really resonate with.
What are the biggest markets for you?
New York City is by far our biggest market, and it has been probably since we launched there [in 2011]. But we have a lot of growth in our secondary and tertiary markets. Also, we’re now in eight countries. London has become a huge market for us, which is really exciting to see. Toronto is a big market as well. Obviously, the Bay Area is still our home, and so we have really great brand equity there. LA is a big market. We’re now in hundreds and hundreds of cities across the globe. It’s fun since sometimes we get into competitions to see which city can grow faster, but they all have different trajectories.
Is the action mostly in cities?
Today, yes. As you know, we’re owned by Ikea, so we also definitely think a lot about how we can support the Ikea business and support Ikea customers who want their furniture to be assembled and delivered. In the US, we also do delivery for Ikea, and so we make sure that we can cover all Ikea stores. Most of them are not located in urban city centers, and they’re much bigger in Europe. So, a market like Germany has 50 to 60 stores, which is the same as the number of stores in the US but the US is triple or quadruple the size of Germany. It’s much more densely populated, and we want to make sure that we cover all the Ikea markets.
I want to come back to the Ikea relationship because I think that is super interesting. It’s been several years now and I’m very curious how that has developed. But I want to stay focused on the cities for one second. I lived in New York City for a long time. Now I live in the suburbs. When I moved to the suburbs, I just started buying more and more tools. It’s just a thing that happens when you move to the suburbs. I didn’t have the space to have a bunch of tools and capabilities in my apartment in New York City. Is that why there are bigger markets in the cities? People just don’t have the stuff or the skills?
I think it has to do a lot with market density and liquidity. You want to be closer to the jobs, but I would say the suburbs are our fastest growing markets overall compared to cities because there is just a lot of opportunity. When we moved to the suburbs, my husband was also very keen to buy tools and start doing work around the house, and that didn’t turn out very well for us. Maybe it turns out well for others, but we still have Taskers here quite often because there’s just a lot of work to do. You have more square footage, and by definition, every single additional square foot will require more work. So, we see a lot of potential in the suburbs as well.
One of the things that is interesting to me about the broader economy, as you’re describing it, is the people who want to fill their time with work. They want to make more money and see the opportunity and that liquidity in the market. But that supply of effort requires time, right? People’s time isn’t being filled with their full-time jobs. They’re between jobs or they might be out of a job. Do you see a correlation between the health of the overall economy and the Tasker supply?
We do. For around the last three years, we’ve definitely seen more supply than we can handle on the platform. We now have waitlists in many cities because we don’t want to onboard a Tasker and then not be able to provide them with jobs. It’s sort of a false premise. I want to make sure that if you are on our platform, there’s work for you to do. As the economy has changed over the last few years — especially over the last couple of years as we’ve seen a bit more struggle — we’ve had thousands and thousands of Taskers applying every year. It’s 15 to 20 percent more than the year before.
Does that feel like a recession indicator to you?
I’m not an economist, and I read all of this stuff just like you do. If you do read that stuff, we should’ve had a recession last year and one the year before, and those predictions turn out to be wrong. So, I think the word is “uncertainty.” We just don’t know because at least over the last two years, we understood what was going on a little bit more.
There’s just a lot of uncertainty overall. It’s very hard to predict what’s going to happen with tariffs, with bond yields, with interest rates, with the housing market. All I can say is we see an increase in Tasker applications. I’m not sure that that’s an indication that a recession is coming.
Do you see an increase in the number of people who are buying services from Taskrabbit? Because that’s the other side of the equation. Is demand also going up?
Demand is going up, and that’s great to see. There’s a bit of a caveat to that, and it’s not just Taskrabbit. There are, as you mentioned, multiple players. For all of us, demand is going up. We’re still such a small portion of the overall market and its overall possibilities. Most people still assemble their own furniture, put up their own TVs, and clean their own houses. Even though we see a lot of growth, there’s still so much opportunity to continue growing. Even after 10 to 15 years, it still feels like the market is quite nascent and services are still hard to figure out. There’s a lot to think about, especially when it comes to how we match the perfect Tasker to the client.
I talk a lot about mounting. We have thousands of Taskers who can mount your TV, which is great, but can they be available on a Friday evening, mount it on a brick wall, and know how to hide the cables? That’s a different skill than mounting a smaller TV on a normal wall. There’s a lot of variables that go into an actual perfect job, and we still have a lot of work to do there. So, there’s still a lot of growth opportunity.
I love that we’re talking about mounting TVs so much because that’s totally my wheelhouse, and The Verge audience knows that. I love talking about mounting TVs. This is great. We’re just in the strike zone for me.
How do you get that data? How do you evaluate who is good at mounting a TV above a fireplace versus just on a regular piece of drywall?
There are many ways. First of all, we now have AI models and tools that help us do this even faster, but the Taskers themselves tell us what capabilities they have, and we ask pretty structured questions and they can actually explain. But the bigger piece of data comes from their experience on the platform and having done similar tasks previously.
So if they tell us that they hung up this type of TV, we can use that data to match them to exactly that kind of job again. Of course, the clients provide reviews, so we can search automatically just with words, and there’s then structured data and understanding their skill set. We take that all into consideration as we build out a more optimal match.
There’s a relationship there between what customers are saying, the reviews they’re leaving, whether they validate the skills, and the rates that Taskers can charge. Is that a correlation you can measure?
Taskers do set their own rates, which makes us very different from many of the other platforms that you see in the market. It’s why so many Taskers actually love coming to Taskrabbit. If I had to summarize, they fully recognize how to set their rates, so we provide a lot of guidance to them. We take into consideration where you are based, what types of tasks you perform, your previous reviews. And then based on what the market is doing, we have a rate we could potentially suggest. They don’t take our suggestions all the time, which is fine. They get to set their own rate.
To bring it back to TV mounting — again, my favorite topic — you could pay less money for someone with fewer reviews and take on more risk that they might not know what they’re doing. Or you might pay more money for someone who appears to know what they’re doing.
That feels like a pricing strategy that should exist on the platform. Whenever we talk about the gig economy, I get workers emailing us saying, “I just want to know how to make more money.” It feels like on Taskrabbit, the best way to do it is to just charge more because they can set the rates.
Of course, they can set the rates, but if they charge too much, the market is not going to reward them in a way they might want. So, you can definitely set your rates higher than what the market is willing to bear. If you’re in a market where there are thousands of other Taskers, that’ll manifest itself on the platform by having you essentially get fewer jobs if you’re pricing much higher than what clients are willing to pay.
Do you see that rates go up over time for an individual Tasker or in aggregate?
Rates are going up in aggregate. They definitely have ebbed and flowed. It also matters a lot on the markets. Certain markets are obviously much higher than other markets. As we see trends with inflation and what’s going on externally, the rates tend to follow because even supplies are becoming more expensive for Taskers. Then, their lives are becoming more expensive, so they need to charge more as well. So we do see, in aggregate, rates moving up.
Do you know the categories where rates have gone up the highest?
It really depends. Moving is one of our highest categories in terms of rates just because it’s a more complex product. You can take hours to help someone move. In terms of total job number, that’s obviously one of the higher ones. If you look at per hour numbers, it really varies by market. There isn’t a single trend.
Then in aggregate, the rates across the platform are going up as well?
Yes.
If I’m an individual Tasker there for five years, is it generally true that I can just charge more over time because I have more reviews and more data to back up that I know what I’m doing?
I don’t think that’s generally true because if you have a lot more supply in that market, you’re competing all the time. You can’t just assume that you’re going to be able to raise your rates over time. When people start up, it’s a bit similar to Airbnb. When you’re a brand new host, you come in and you have no reviews and no ratings. You want people to stay in your home and you want to do a good job, so you may price a bit lower just to make sure that you show up in search results and that people book your place.
As you gain more experience, understand what your guests want, provide those things for them, and you continue to get really great reviews and really great feedback, you’re able to raise the prices. But there’s a limit as more and more Airbnbs show up in that market. So, there are many components that help you figure out how to price, and Airbnb, just like Taskrabbit, also helps hosts figure out what the right pricing schematic could be. But it’s definitely not just a science.
Airbnb is a perfect example because it lets people set rates and it has all kinds of pricing tools. The other end is Uber, which doesn’t let anyone set a price. If you’re the best Uber driver or the worst, it kind of doesn’t matter. Uber is just pricing for you. That dynamic has led to a lot of frustration over there.
It seems like the challenge in your case is that if you get good enough, get famous enough, and you’ve had enough customers, you might leave the platform. You can just do more effective marketing and take a higher margin on your own. How do you make sure you don’t have that graduation problem?
I mean you could, but it’s not just about marketing. That’s one of the biggest services that we provide, but it’s also about scheduling. It’s also about providing some level of protection so if things go wrong, we’re there to help, and to provide consistent work. So yes, you can leave the platform and try to do this on your own. We hope that we provide such great service to our Taskers that it’s harder for them to manage outside of the platform.
For example, if you’re working on multiple platforms or doing it on your own, you’re managing your own Google Calendar. It’s really hard to sync them all and think about how to manage your time appropriately. We can help do that for you. We can help figure it out and make sure that the tasks we’re providing are the ones most matched to your skill set because we understand your history and we understand what the client wants. We can make sure that the tasks that are visible to you are the ones that are closer to your home.
So, there are a lot of additional services and benefits that we provide to the Taskers where they want to stay on a platform because it’s easier for them. Also, if they set a rate of $100 per hour, they get to take home $100, which is very different from some of the other platforms.
Walk me through that. What’s the revenue model for you? How do you make your money?
We make our money just like many platforms do, where we have to charge either one or both sides of the marketplace for the services we provide. I just explained some of the services for Taskers. We also provide a lot of services to the clients. The way things work on our platform for clients is when they book a job, they pay an additional service fee to Taskrabbit for everything from quality assurance and fraud to just being able to find the Tasker.
You’re saying these people have been vetted. They actually know how to hang the TV.
Exactly.
There’s a lot of temptation in every marketplace like this to charge both sides. Why not charge the Taskers?
To be fair, we haven’t tried this. We haven’t experimented with this at least since I’ve been here. I believe this has been tested previously. I think that the Taskers themselves are keen to provide the best service that they can, and we want to make sure that we are a supply-based marketplace. As you well know, this thing doesn’t work without supply, and you kind of have to start with supply.
For me and for Taskrabbit, it’s really important that we have the best quality supply, and we don’t need to be charging the Taskers for that. We don’t use a lead gen model. We are instead making sure that the entire job gets booked from the very beginning. We’re there to hold it together with the client and the Tasker all the way through to payment as opposed to just giving a client a few names and saying, “Go try them out.” So, we believe that the service we’re providing is ensuring that the job happens and it’s high quality. For that, we primarily charge the client.
You’ve made a distinction here between what you call lead gen platforms where they charge for demand. You’re a plumber, you want to get some customers, you would charge some service to get you some customers. Describe what you mean by lead gen and how Taskrabbit is different.
So I’ll just talk about what Taskrabbit does and then perhaps compare it a bit to what other platforms do. Taskrabbit allows you to book a Tasker on a platform. I guess one word to think about what we do is “shepherd” this process all the way through. So, we make sure that the Tasker shows up, that the task actually gets done, and then we collect payment from you and the client. We then distribute that payment to the Tasker, make sure that you can write the review for the Tasker, and so on.
There’s just a whole slew of things that happen, including the fact that if something goes wrong, you can pick up the phone and call or you can send us a message and say, “Hey, the Tasker’s late,” or, “The Tasker canceled, what should I do next?” That’s different than just getting the names of three or four potential providers and forcing you as a client to call each of them and start negotiating on a price or the time before the person comes and does whatever task. If something goes wrong, it’s really just between you and that provider. With us, we’re there all the way through until the job closes.
When you say you’re not a lead gen model, that feels really important. That’s a principle that you need to hold onto because every other company that’s similarly situated does sort of charge both sides. Substack, for example, takes 10 percent of everyone’s earnings just to send emails. It would tell you it does a lot more than just send emails,
But it has a graduation problem. People leave the platform because you can get cheaper email distribution elsewhere. Substack has to build new services in order to justify its 10 percent for its highest-volume writers. You don’t have that problem. Does that pressure just not exist or does that pressure exist and you keep it away?
Of course it exists. So Taskers definitely leave the platform, and clients leave the platform.
Sorry, I meant the pressure to charge both sides of the marketplace.
No because again, I really feel that we don’t need to charge the Taskers to make the money that we make. We provide enough services to both sides, but the client is willing to bear that cost and that has worked for us. It doesn’t mean that it’s always going to work and that our models and the way we match are always going to be the same. We’re constantly experimenting. We are looking at other ways with many of the components that we’re talking about because we have to continue evolving. But right now, this works for us. So today, we don’t see changing the model to charge Taskers.
I think that brings me to Ikea. So Ikea bought Taskrabbit in 2017. It’s a complicated transaction, but the upshot is Ikea now owns Taskrabbit. Do you think it’s that ownership that protects you from the pressure to increase revenue by charging both sides of the marketplace? I feel like if you were a public company you might feel that pressure much more keenly.
It may be. I don’t know. I’ve never been a CEO of a public company. I can tell you that we have pretty big goals and high pressure from Ikea. Obviously, there is a component of stability that comes with having Ikea as a parent, and there are good and bad things about this. The good thing is we are not a public company nor VC-funded, and I don’t have to worry about how things are going to evolve financially in the same way.
But that can make you a bit more complacent. So we’re trying hard to ensure that we have very ambitious goals and a very big vision so that the teams work really hard to continue to grow. There are many ways that we can drive the business forward, actually build growth capabilities. Charging Taskers is not one of them, but there are many other ways where we think we have a lot of opportunity in terms of growth.
Let me ask you the big Decoder question here, which is expressed in two ways. First, how is Taskrabbit structured inside of Ikea? How does that work?
Well, we operate very independently inside of Ikea. I report to a board and the board is made up of Ikea executives and external board members. We have three board meetings a year because Ikea works in tertials, not quarters.
That’s very Ikea to make up its own complicated Swedish word. It’s perfect.
It’s so Ikea, but it works for me. So, we meet three times a year, we set targets together, and that’s it. Now, I do work very closely with Ikea in a different way — more in a business sense — where there was a lot of opportunity to ensure that Ikea customers have access to Taskrabbit. In some sense, Taskrabbit customers have access to Ikea, but Ikea has millions of people visiting its apps, its sites, and, of course, its big stores. We want to make sure that we have access to those customers in the best way possible.
So, we’ve done some great things there. Just recently in the US — but we had done so elsewhere before — we made it so that it’s much more seamless for Ikea customers to purchase, let’s say, a desk and assembly all at the same time and pay for it at Ikea checkout versus having to go separately to the Taskrabbit app, try to put in the very fun Ikea furniture names, and then try to figure out how to get it assembled. That’s a great example of how the two companies can really leverage their capabilities.
At the end of the day, Ikea purchased Taskrabbit under the premise that there are some potential Ikea customers who don’t want to be Ikea customers because they feel overwhelmed by the idea of putting together furniture. We want to be there to help to solve that problem, and I think we’ve done a very good job there.
Let me connect that to the supply conversation we were just having. I’ve put together a lot of Ikea furniture in my day. I feel like I’m pretty good at it. That’s a relatively specialized skill. Reading an Ikea instruction manual is like learning another language in many ways.
I think it depends who you ask. Some people are really good at this.
By the way, one of my dream stories is that we go to a conference of flat-pack furniture designers and the Ikea people come in dressed all in black and everyone’s like, “It’s the Ikea designers.” It’s obviously the easiest to put together, but it’s like a whole ecosystem.
It’s a whole thing. But I can tell you, watching our Taskers put together Ikea furniture, it is impressive. They know the furniture, so they can do this so well inside and out. They just do it with such speed. You may be good, but you’re never going to be an Ikea Tasker who is doing this day in and day out.
That’s kind of what I’m getting at. It’s a specialized skill. I would actually say putting together Ikea furniture is different than putting together the furniture you would buy at Target or Walmart. They’re different companies with different styles. The way that things fit together is literally different.
Again, my dream story is that we find rival flat-pack design gangs and put them head to head. I don’t know if that’s how it works, it’s just how it works in my brain. That’s a specialized supply. Do you keep that pool aside and say, “These are the people who are best at assembling Ikea kitchens and we’re going to make sure they’re available to Ikea”?
They get to choose. I would say the majority of the Taskers who assemble Ikea furniture are also really good at assembling furniture from Wayfair, Target, and other places. They want to assemble furniture. The way it works on our platform is there’s an Ikea assembly furniture category because, like you said, it’s specialized, but then there’s just furniture assembly where it could be a piece from anywhere. Those Taskers definitely cross.
Many of them are also handymen, so they will do minor home repairs, like if your doorknob is loose. They have great skills. Some of them want to just focus only on Ikea furniture, but I would say that’s the minority. Many of them cross into multiple categories.
Because Ikea is a parent, do you reserve supply or is that just not a problem?
It’s just not a problem in all the countries that we serve. I alluded to this earlier, but Ikea is much bigger in Europe, so a larger portion of our Taskers know how to assemble Ikea furniture in Europe versus the US because we get a lot more Ikea jobs in Europe. The Ikea business is just much stronger over there. So no, we don’t keep them separate. We let them choose whatever category they want. We do not have any challenges with finding supply though, even in Europe.
You mentioned that Ikea has its own pressures on you and its own goals for Taskrabbit. What are those goals?
The goals are always about growth. How do we continue to grow faster and how do we continue to evolve where we’re solving the right problems for the overall customer and the Ikea customer? We just recently acquired a delivery company here in the US that does delivery of big and bulky things so that we can help Ikea deliver furniture to your home.
It wants to make sure that we are able to expand to other countries. We’re only in eight countries, while Ikea is in dozens of countries, so there’s still a lot of opportunity for growth that way. So, there are definitely pressures, but they’re similar to what any other parent or investor would have.
And then there’s Taskrabbit itself. How many people is Taskrabbit?
Right now, we’re nearly 500 folks.
How is that structured?
So, we are structured like many other companies. Today, we’re very functionally focused with a matrix overlay. We have [general managers] looking over the US market and GMs looking over the European market and each country. There’s always a bit of tension… or I would say maybe not a bit. I would like there to be a bit, there’s probably a lot of tension between some of the needs that are unique per market or per country versus having fully functional ways of thinking about the problems.
As an example, there are different competitive pressures in different markets, and there are different ways that customers go onto platforms and book their tasks. There are specific needs that customers in France have that are not applicable to the market in the US. How do we make that tradeoff? France is a much smaller overall portion of our business than the US, but you have to continue growing across the world. So, there’s definitely healthy tension across there.
Put that into practice. What Taskrabbit makes most of all is a software product. You say that customers in France have needs that customers in the US don’t have. What are those needs and how do they get expressed in the product?
For example, there is some local tax law in France that allows customers who do work on their house to get some tax benefit, which is a great thing. This isn’t something we have in the US, and so we want to make sure that customers have access to that. But to do that, you have to build out a different flow and allow them to be able to submit whatever tax documents that say that this is the work they’ve done. There’s dozens of these examples across markets.
Marketing campaigns also have to be different because people are different in every market, and they resonate with different types of themes and creative. How do we go broad but also have local capabilities? That ends up causing tension across the world, and that’s what makes it fun. Certainly we don’t have it figured out yet.
My joke on Decoder is if you tell me the structure of your company, I can tell you 80 percent of the problems. If you tell me you’re functional with a hybrid overlay, I can definitely tell you 80 percent of the problems.
Here’s the thing: I’ve gone through that a lot, but there is no perfect structure. If there was one, then we would all be doing that, and we wouldn’t have to have this conversation. If you have a functional structure, it creates certain sets of problems. You can sort of fix them by going to a GM or a business unit structure. Then, unsurprisingly, you create other sets of problems. So, to me, it is not so much about the structure. It’s much more about the skills and capabilities that people have, the incentives, and how they are uniquely positioned to work across boundaries, functions, or geographies. That’s much harder to do.
It really comes back to culture. What are our values and how do we get people to really think and row in the same direction, whatever the strategy may be? Those are the bigger problems, and I don’t think that changing the structure gets you closer to an answer. I think these types of adaptive problems are more difficult to solve and are actually more challenging. I don’t think changing structure is the answer.
Maybe one of the hottest quiet debates on the show over the past few months is whether or not structure is a proxy for culture. You seem to be very much in the line that it’s not. We’ve had some opposite answers, but it feels like the split to me is whether you have multiple kinds of businesses you’re running or you have one core product.
Once you end up in the multiple lines of business, the structure starts to reflect very different kinds of tensions and tradeoffs. Do you think that Taskrabbit has just one core business, or do you have multiple lines of business that you’re trying to operate?
Historically, it’s been one core business, but it’s definitely separate from the delivery piece. There are many different things that we need to think about. We need to think about A to B, which we didn’t have to think about before. We need to think about how to locate all sorts of components that are different from our core business. Still, it’s really important to us. We think it’s a great opportunity that is very connected to the moving business.
We are thinking a lot about what that means. Do we have a separate moving business business unit and what does that look like? Again, at the end of the day, it’s not so much about structure. It’s much more about the culture, how we can feel a sense of shared responsibility across the company, understanding what our priorities are, and what our vision and strategy are. Is it all aligned? Are we all able to row in the same direction? Is it very clear? Have we set the right expectations? These, again, are things that I think are more difficult to answer.
The other big question to ask everybody on Decoder is about decisions. How do you make decisions? What’s your framework?
I know there are many different answers here. I think there are different ways to describe them — one-way doors are decisions that I’m sure you’ve heard of — but the things that are really hard to reverse. So, closing down the office during COVID, reopening an office, or acquiring a company.
These are bigger decisions, but I really trust my team and then think a lot about how they are empowering their teams to make their own decisions. I spend a lot of my time with customers. I think it’s really important, whether it’s having Taskers at my house or spending a lot of time interviewing Taskers or clients. But day to day, I’m not as close to the problem as the people who I want to have the authority or the agency to solve those problems. They are hopefully spending much more time with the customer than even I am and understanding that specific problem much better than my team and I do.
For me, it’s really important to empower the team to make decisions. You have to test and try. The thing that we keep focusing on is making decisions quickly because the speed is what gets you behind. You can constantly be looking for more data and more certainty, and most of that doesn’t exist. You have to start using your gut — your instinct or however you define that — to look at your past experience. You have some pattern recognition. You kind of understand how things may go, you weigh them, and you make a call. Doing that quicker is the most important thing.
You just described being close to the customer. It’s interesting. Your history at Uber is as the head of courier operations, right?
That’s right.
You were on the supply side working with the courier.
Same with Airbnb. I definitely have a soft spot for the supply side of the business. Frankly, this is why I am doing the gig economy. When I was younger, my family and I emigrated from Poland. In the ’80s, my parents were trying to find jobs with more hours. It was all hourly work, and it was hard to make ends meet. I often wish that these types of platforms existed then because no matter what, you can hustle and make more money. I definitely can relate to the supply side of the business a lot more.
How do you make sure that the Taskers are happy? If everyone is doing this kind of work because they’re not making enough money, there’s sort of an inherent unhappiness there. How do you make sure that they are happy and enthusiastic about doing this instead of having to do it because the economy is in turmoil?
I don’t know if the premise that Taskers are unhappy is right.
I think the premise that supply is increasing because the economy is in turmoil is kind of bearing itself out.
Correct. But I’ll tell you, I have Taskers showing up at my house every month or week, and these are people who are really striving to make an incremental income or their main income. They love having the opportunity to use their skills to do something or to help someone else while making a pretty good wage, generally speaking. Like I’ve said, we’ve done a lot of things. We try to provide a lot of additional benefits for them. We try to help them and make sure that they can call us.
We have a whole team that is focused just on helping Taskers make money. This team will help you think about how you set prices, think about the categories you’re in, how you can make sure that your write-up is correct, and so on. We’re providing a lot of AI tools for Taskers to do that as well, but having that human interaction really helps. So, if you’re here on our platform and you want to make money, there’s an opportunity to make money. We want to be the people who help them do that.
I’m very curious about what you have Taskers at your house to do every couple of weeks. How many TVs are you hanging up Ania?
[Laughs] No, it’s not TVs. Don’t tell my husband this because he still pretends that he can do these things, but he really doesn’t. He doesn’t notice that it’s broken and he doesn’t notice that it’s now fixed. The house just runs. This is okay.
I had someone come in here the other day and mount a bunch of pictures in my son’s room. I had someone come in to assemble furniture, like these bookcases behind me. I had someone come to help with my lawn. There’s an infinite number of ways to get someone to help you in your home.
What have you learned about your own platform that you wanted to improve by using it as much as you do?
So much. Make it simpler. Always make it simpler. Make it easier. I may not care to choose who the Tasker is. I just want to make sure that it’s going to be a person who can do the job really well, and I want to do it as affordably as I can. So sometimes, it would be appreciated to have a bit more help in choosing. So, we’re working on that.
You’ve mentioned AI several times. I’ve been asking basically everyone what happens when you have agents and more capable assistants built into your phones. I keep calling this the “DoorDash problem,” but you could call it the “Taskrabbit problem” or the “Uber problem.” The idea that I could just tell Siri, “I need to get a TV hung up,” and then Siri goes off, clicks around the apps for me, and brings a Tasker to my house is very powerful.
There are a lot of companies attempting to build their way towards that goal. Google just announced a bunch of stuff, Microsoft just announced a bunch of stuff. That would disintermediate you, right? At the end of the day, you would just become a commoditized service provider to an assistant that might be collecting all the user interaction and own the customer relationship. Have you looked forward to that problem? Do you know how you want to address it?
I absolutely look forward to the problem. I look at it a little bit differently. If those agents exist, you have to go to where the customer is. We have people that come to our sites every day, but if people want to go to Ikea and book a Tasker via Ikea, we’re not going to say no. If they want to go to Target and do that, we’re not going to say no. If they want to go to Siri and do that, we’re not going to say no. It’s very easy to fall into thinking, “I don’t own the customer” and “I don’t know what’s going to happen with the customer.”
But the customer will know that this is a Tasker, or we can make sure that they know that this is a Tasker. They can understand that they’re working with another party, and they can come back directly or they don’t have to. Then, there will be some economic way to figure out a system where it works for both parties. Siri, in this case, wants to be able to provide these types of services, and they can’t really do it without Taskrabbit because only Taskrabbit actually has a network of thousands of Taskers. We cultivated that network. We know who they are and we understand their skills. They’ve all been background checked.
Siri, Apple, or whoever is not going to do that. They’re just not going to be able to do that. We will always have the strength and supply, and we will continue to go where the customer is to make sure as many of them have access to our platform as possible.
Isn’t that the story of the internet though? Isn’t it the companies and the platforms that have the strength and demand that get to set the terms?
I think it’s a bit different when you look at a gig economy marketplace. At the end of the day, it takes a lot of work to bring together a set of Taskers or hosts or Uber drivers. It’s really hard to acquire these folks and to make sure that they provide the quality that you want, and I don’t see other companies being able to do that.
I also think it’s too early. There are so many ways to test this and how to make it work. The example that you provided, we’re still not quite there. There are many situations where it sounds great, but there are many that are still hindered from actually being a seamless experience. There’s payments, logging in, accounts, and all sorts of ways that all of this can and will be resolved. But that gives us a chance to test a lot of different models and understand what works best for the Tasker, for the client, and in this case, for the two parties involved.
I’m with you that it hasn’t been proven to work, but I also go to the events and watch Amazon executives demonstrate the next version of Alexa and it books an appointment on Thumbtack when the dishwasher is broken. I can see how you want Taskrabbit in that mix, but then you are next to Thumbtack and the agent might just pick the lowest price, especially if you’re charging the customer. You might just pick the service you were told about.
Look, we’re very different from Thumbtack because Thumbtack is a lead gen product that is very hard to close, whereas we provide the experience all the way through. In the demo that you described, the client still has to go and work with whoever the end provider is. In this case, it’s someone to fix your dishwasher. This isn’t something that we have to do. Our product would look very different because we are able to shepherd the entire experience through.
You close the loop. You actually send the task to the Tasker.
We close the loop, but again, we’re still quite far from where that could go. I think the possibilities are endless, and we have to go where the customer is. If everyone all of a sudden goes and talks to the phone and that’s how they order things or talk to Siri, I don’t know how we would not be there.
Do you think it’s different because you are not a lead gen model? I think about Thumbtack, for example. At some point, it’s just there to deliver demand to a bunch of HVAC technicians or whoever was in that demonstration. Maybe Siri delivers that demand, and Thumbtack gets totally disintermediated. You’re saying that’s not your model and you’re not worried about it, and you’re charging the customer anyway. So would you just charge a higher rate for an agent to solve the problem?
There are so many different economic structures that can work here. We’re in the very early stages. We may all think and guesstimate that this is the right structure, and then at year end we can decide, “Wow, this doesn’t work for us, the third party, or the client. We’re not getting enough people to actually do this.” There’s a lot of trial and error here, and it’s too early to be saying, “This is the right model and this is the right structure.”
What are the most promising early flashes you’ve seen?
I think the concept of having an agent do things for you is very interesting. If you take it a lot further, eventually in theory, we won’t even have laptops, our Kindles, or whatever. We might just have agents constantly doing things for us on other types of devices. I think it’s super exciting to be a part of that journey, but I think none of it has been proven and we’re still actually pretty far away. Although technology is changing so quickly. It’s quite remarkable to watch. It’s quite remarkable to be alive during this time.
I go to all the demos and I have the same reaction as you, which is, “Does this actually work?” They’re very convincing demos.
They are. I was just at a conference where someone was adamantly telling me that it’ll only be three years before a robot can hang up a TV.
I don’t believe that for a second.
I don’t believe that. I just don’t.
I have hung up a lot of TVs.
This person was very adamant. Anytime that I’m hearing about any work that is being done in a physical space, it’s still really far away. They’re working on having robots try to empty the dishwasher, and that’s a complex task. It’s really complex when you really think about it. There’s a lot that still has to happen.
One of the things that I’m thinking about a lot is where does automation come and where does it go? Taskrabbit doesn’t seem easily automatable from the jump, as you’re describing it. A lot of these tasks are really, really hard for robotics to begin to try to solve, like hanging a TV or emptying the dishwasher. Many rounds of innovation have to happen to make that viable.
But for other similarly situated competitors or peers you have like Uber, you can see how automation will change their business. The cars will drive themselves. That’s going to change the business in radical ways, and we’ll see how that goes. Do you see any automation that might change how Taskrabbit works in the near future?
From a software platform perspective? One hundred percent. But in the context of what happens in someone’s home? I really don’t see a robot mowing the lawn just yet. But it will happen.
We just reviewed a bunch of robotic lawnmowers that you can buy and they don’t work very well.
Right. They don’t work very well. The internet didn’t work very well whenever it started. The cellphones we had didn’t work very well. So, it will evolve, but I think we’re still quite far away.
On the software side, what do you see that’s going to change?
For Taskrabbit, how we optimize the match between the client and Tasker is going to change. We can get so much smarter. I think how clients will come to our platform will change. Just the basics of how SEO and SEM work. Those terms will barely apply [in the future], and that will happen much sooner than a robot hanging up your TV. I think that pace of that change is much more accelerated.
Do you think that’s where the growth is going to come from?
Absolutely.
When you talk to one of the car companies, they think all their growth is coming from the cars driving themselves. They can see the massive margins that come from getting rid of the drivers. But you don’t have that opportunity.
Not yet. I understand their point. It’s pretty remarkable to take a Waymo in San Francisco. I was at Walmart many years ago, and Walmart’s offices are right across the street from YouTube. After YouTube became part of Google, there were a lot of self-driving cars — they were not called Waymos then — driving around, and they looked so foreign. Obviously, they had [test] drivers in them. And now look at it. So, this will happen. I understand the excitement. I just think we’re further away from that in home services.
Have you had any conversations with the big AI companies about being a provider to their would-be agent platforms?
We are continually exploring our options.
That’s the only non-answer you’ve given so far and I appreciate it. Does Ikea have a plan to build some great agent? Ikea has had many software platforms of its own over the years.
I’m not sure, so I don’t want to put words in their mouth. I know that AI is a critical investment and that it’s looking at it in all parts of the business, but I wouldn’t know exactly where it sees the most innovation.
When I talked to Dara Khosrowshahi from Uber about what I keep calling the “DoorDash problem,” he said, “Look, at first we’re going to build it and we’ll see if it works. If it’s cool and if it works, we’re going to charge high rates to make our business work, or maybe we’ll come to some other arrangement.” That was basically his point of view.
I think that’s a great answer.
So, you’re tracking there? Let’s just see if this is cool?
Absolutely. Let’s make sure that we’re involved. I think it is the right answer. We were part of the demo with Google last week. We’re definitely doing more than dipping our toes into it.
There’s a lot of ways to build those integrations. I went to Google I/O and I watched what it called Project Mariner.
That’s right. We’re part of that.
It’s running Chrome on a data center and AI is literally clicking around the website.
That’s right, and you can see it. I would say that’s still somewhat rudimentary. I think you can do better. But again, it’s just a first step. It’s okay.
That to me seems like a Rube Goldberg machine. APIs exist. We know how to make computers and databases talk to each other. This is fully ridiculous. Then, there are new age ways of doing it, like Anthropic’s Model Context Protocol, where the agents have a more structured way of communicating. It’s kind of just APIs, but they’re cooler APIs.
It’s more seamless.
Which of those ways do you think is going to be the future for you? Are you just trying them all?
I think whatever is easiest for the customer is going to be the future.
Who is the customer here?
At the end of the day, it’s the people who are paying for these services. In our instance, it’s the clients who need things fixed around the home. I think whatever is easiest for them is eventually what’s going to work. I know Project Mariner kind of seems odd. You’re just watching this mouse move around.
It’s kind of eerie.
It is. But at the end of the day, it’s just the first step. I think Google is going to continue to evolve there. I don’t want to say which way is the right way because eventually, all of these platforms will build products that will make it much more seamless for the customer to get things done. We just want to make sure we’re involved.
Ania, this is great. What’s next for Taskrabbit? What should people be looking for?
We have some very fun things coming up. Ikea is a partner and has been a very successful partner. We believe we can have other very successful partners. We just rolled out a suite of products that will allow us to speak to those partners via an API much faster to ensure that their customers can come and use Taskrabbit services. So, we’re really excited about that opportunity.
The other thing that’s really big is the continued evolution of how we match a client and a Tasker. The way you may see that as a client or a Tasker on our apps is just a more seamless way to know that you’re getting the right person to do that TV mounting task on a brick wall.
I’m absolutely going to sign up for Taskrabbit to mount some TVs in my neighborhood. It feels like the thing I’m doing this afternoon.
If you love doing it, you should absolutely be doing it. You live in a neighborhood where I think there’s a lot of people mounting TVs.
There’s going to be a lot of crooked TVs here in Westchester. Thank you so much for coming on Decoder, you’re going to have to come back soon.
Thanks so much. I really enjoyed our conversation.
Questions or comments about this episode? Hit us up at decoder@theverge.com. We really do read every email!
]]>Today, I’m talking with Runway CEO and cofounder Cris Valenzuela. This one’s special: Cris and I were live at an event in New York City last month hosted by AlixPartners, so you’ll hear the audience in the background from time to time.
Runway is one of the leading AI video generation platforms. The basic concept is familiar by now: you start with a reference image — either something you’ve created using Runway’s own model or something you upload — you type in a prompt, and Runway spits out a fully formed video sequence.
But what’s most interesting to me about Runway is that while the AI hype is at a fever pitch right now, there’s a little more depth to the company. Cris founded the company back in 2018, so he’s been through some boom-and-bust periods in AI, and you’ll hear that experience come through as we talk about the technology and what it can and can’t do. When Cris began to more seriously explore AI video generation, as a researcher at New York University, we still mostly referred to AI as “machine learning,” and you’ll hear him recount how primitive the technology was back then compared to now.
Listen to Decoder, a show hosted by The Verge’s Nilay Patel about big ideas — and other problems. Subscribe here!
That said, the AI hype really is out of control, and Runway is on the same collision course with creators, artists, and copyright law as every other part of the AI industry — and you’ll hear Cris and I really get into all that here.
One theme you’ll hear Cris come back to again and again in this conversation is that he does not see Runway as a disruptive outsider to filmmaking, but rather as an active participant in the art. He sees Runway as a tool that will bring filmmaking and other forms of artistic expression to many more people, and not as an apocalyptic force that’s going to hit Hollywood like a wrecking ball.
You’ll hear him say Runway is working with many of the biggest movie studios — publicly, it has already struck a deal with Lionsgate and AMC Networks. In the AMC announcement, Cris said embracing AI video generation was a “make-or-break moment” for every entertainment company.
But cozying up to Hollywood doesn’t mean Runway is off the hook in the AI vs. art debate. In fact, Runway itself is part of an ongoing class-action lawsuit over the use of artistic works in AI training data. Last year, it was revealed Runway had trained on huge swaths of copyrighted YouTube material, including The Verge’s own YouTube channel.
So I asked Cris as plainly as I could whether Runway had in fact trained on YouTube and how the industry might survive a world where all these companies are made to pay substantial amounts of money to creators if even one of these big AI copyright lawsuits doesn’t break their way. I think you’ll find our discussion on this to be pretty candid, and Cris articulated some of his own defenses for how the AI industry has approached this topic and what might happen next.
It’s Decoder, so of course we also talked about Runway’s structure. Cris has a lot to say about Runway functioning as a research lab, and the tension that exists between releasing and refining real products and then putting them into the hands of professionals, all while working on new models and tools that might make the current tech obsolete.
Okay: Runway CEO Cris Valenzuela. Here we go.
This interview has been lightly edited for length and clarity.
You started Runway before the big AI boom. We were joking earlier that the URL is Runway.ml because people were calling it machine learning before. What’s changed since the boom in that approach? Have you had to rethink, “Okay, everyone understands what training a model is now, and the market for GPUs is more expensive.” What are the changes?
A lot has changed. I think we started the company in 2018. Machine learning was the way we referenced the field of AI broadly. I think a few things have changed. First of all, models have become really good. I mean, it’s obvious to everyone. I hope everyone here has used an AI model by now. I’m assuming that has happened. Seven years ago, no one had. I think consistency, quality, and overall output of models across the board have gotten really good, and that has just changed people’s experiences with AI.
I think the second thing that is becoming more real is the value of these models and how useful they are. It’s becoming more evident to many people. A couple of years ago, it was more theoretical about how they could potentially be used. There are still many avenues where we don’t entirely know how AI will change things. We just know it well. In some others, it has really changed many things.
In learning and education, it’s pretty clear that pretty much every student out there, from now into the future, will start using AI models to learn. But I think that has happened. Then competition, of course. Now, everyone’s paying attention to this. When we started, there was really no one trying to build. If you had this same conversation eight years ago, and I told you we’re going to have AI models that can render video in hyperrealistic ways, people would think we were crazy. Now, it’s an obvious direction, and there are a lot of people also trying to solve the same problem.
Was your ability to actually do the work constrained by the amount of compute you had at the beginning? Is it just scaling laws that brought you to where you are today?
So, scale is one of the main things. I think we’ve realized, as an industry, that scale matters. I guess the lesson that we’ve seen over time is that if you just scale computing, then models work really well. I think at the beginning, it wasn’t that obvious. It became more obvious over the last couple of years. And then more compute definitely helps, but more compute and more data, and also better algorithms. So it’s not just one single ingredient. It’s not just that if you get more compute, suddenly, things get better. I think it’s a combination of different things.
Just put this into practice for me. When you guys first started, how long would it take to render a frame of video versus how long now?
When we started, you couldn’t. That’s the thing. The first thing we ever did was a text-to-image model that produced 256-pixel-wide images. If you’ve ever seen a Mark Rothko painting, it was very abstract. That’s the closest it could get. So if you wanted to render a face, a house, or whatever, the result was in the range of colors, but it was very off. We went from that pixelated, very low-res image to 4K content that’s 20 seconds long with very sophisticated movement and actions. I think it’s the realization that at that time, video was not even in the scope of what we thought was possible.
Then, over time, it became really feasible. Now I think we joke that we’re consistently moving the goalpost, where the feedback we get from Runway is like, “Great, Cris. You can generate that bouncing ball on Mars, but in frame 27, the ball’s direction is slightly off.” I’m like, “Great, that’s a great piece of feedback,” because we will solve it. But also, you don’t realize that a year ago, you just didn’t think this was possible.
One of the reasons that I see the big platform companies are so invested in video generation, in particular, is that they’re pointed at the advertising industry. You mentioned you have advertising clients. Mark Zuckerberg is not even subtle anymore. He’s like, “I’m going to kill the advertising industry.” He just says it out loud.
I think he also said something similar at Stripe Sessions a couple of weeks ago. His pitch was something like, “You don’t even have to do anything. Just come to us and tell us how many customers you want, and maybe some ideas about what your product is. I’ll generate video advertising, and I’ll stick it in the feeds, and you just watch the money roll in.” This is a very Mark Zuckerberg way of thinking, but that is the first big market where you see we’re going to bring the cost of making the ads down, and that will result in some return. Is that where the demand is coming in for you as well?
I think that’s a very appealing concept and world for many people who have never had the chance of making ads in the first place. There are many businesses out there that just can’t afford to work with an agency to get a production team to shoot a AAA film or ad. I think part of it is like, “Well, if you can actually help others do that, I think that’s great.” It definitely increases or raises the bar for many because now anyone can do it. I think it’s less about killing the ad agencies; I think that’s an overall simplification. I think it’s more about reducing the time it takes to make something.
The cost of making any piece of content will, hopefully, go down to the cost of inference. So if you’re good at making things and conceptualizing ideas, you’re going to have systems that can aid you in generating whatever you need, but you still need to have a good idea. So you will still have agencies, you’ll still have talent and creatives, but perhaps the time it takes to make things is just going to be dramatically reduced. Hopefully, that opens the door for many other folks to do this work.
Yeah, I mean, I think Mark wants to kill the ad industry.
[Laughs] Yeah, we should ask him, I don’t know.
He’s a very aggressive human being. But the reason I ask that question is because I see so many of these products and so many of these capabilities, and they haven’t yet connected to business results. There was a study from IBM last month stating that 25% of the AI investments they had seen in companies had returned on that investment. It’s a low number. Everyone’s trying stuff and figuring it out. I get it in advertising. I understand that’s just the cost of acquiring customers. Have you seen places in film studios and other places where just bringing the cost down is worth the investment?
Yeah, absolutely. I was just on a call with a studio right before this, and we were going through a script that they wanted to test with Runway. I don’t know if you guys have ever worked in film, but you develop the script, and the common thing to do next is a storyboard. So, you basically take the storyboard and someone spends a week or two weeks just drawing. This is for a scene or a couple of scenes, not for an entire film. It’s really long, really expensive, and time-consuming. So, when they were reading me through the part of the script where they needed our help with Runway, I was generating the storyboards on the fly.
By the time they finished, the storyboard was done. So, I think the first thing was that they couldn’t realize or fully understand what was going on because they had never worked at that velocity, that speed. For them, speed is also cost. If you have to compound the time it takes to make all of those storyboards by hand and they have the screenwriters doing it in real time, then it shrinks the time and the whole project gets developed and worked on. So, you have all these moments and gaps where AI can really just help you accelerate your own work, specifically in creative industries where things are still very manually done.
I actually want to ask you about that because I know you think a lot about the creative industries and the act of creativity. The counterargument to that is the gap between the screenwriter and the storyboard artist, and the time it takes to communicate and translate is where the magic happens. Having the AI collapse that into a mechanical process, as opposed to a creative process, actually reduces the quality of the creative. How do you feel about that?
Yeah, I don’t think I fully agree with that. I think part of it is, I think, that we sometimes obsess about the process of how we make things. The goal of the screenwriter is to get the ideas that he wants in his mind or his world out there. The most obvious ways you work with the set of technologies and tools around you, if you’re able to do it faster, I think that’s great. You can iterate on concepts faster. You can understand your ideas faster. You can collaborate with more people, and you can make more. One of the bigger bottlenecks of media these days is that you have people working on one project for three or four years, then you might actually work on it, and the studio might actually try to kill it for many different reasons.
So, if you think about it, you spend four years of your life working on a thing that never saw the light of day because it happened to be killed for whatever reason. I think the idea will be that you don’t have to work on one project. You can work on many more. So, that’s also the quantity prospect of it that becomes a component we should consider. Because right now, we’re bound by the way we’re working. It’s very slow, and it’s very constrained by all these processes. If you can augment that, then people can start doing more and more and more. I think that’s great.
Is that the model for you? Is it that quantity will drive the business?
I think quantity leads to quality. As an artist, the more you make, the better things you’ll do. No artist has drawn once and thought, “Oh, suddenly, I’m a master.” Picasso painted hundreds of thousands of paintings, and many of you have never seen all of them. You just see the 1%. The same goes for musicians. People are there playing every single day until they hit something that actually works. I think tools should be like that. They should be able to augment how you work so you can do more, and then you’re the one choosing what you’re doing.
But look, I started the company because I always wanted to make films. I grew up in Chile, and I’ve never had the means of even buying a camera in the first place. I got my camera when I was 27 years old. It was pretty late, and part of it was very expensive. I couldn’t afford Adobe software because it was very expensive back then. I probably wouldn’t have become a greater filmmaker, but it would’ve been great if I had the chance to tell the stories that I had in my head. I think it was a technical barrier that prevented me from doing so. Now we have kids in every part of the world using Runway and making those ideas, which I find just fascinating. It’s great.
How does the pricing of Runway work? Where does your revenue come from? What’s the model?
It’s very simple. It’s a subscription. You just pay for the product, and you get access to different parts of it. We have a free tier, so you can also just use it for free. Then we work with schools. There’s a course at NYU, the NYU Film School, that teaches students how to use Runway. So, instead of going to film school and giving you a camera, they give you Runway. We’re doing that with a few other schools as well. For all of those, we just give access for free.
The studios you partner with, do they pay a lot of money, or are they subsidizing it for users?
No. For businesses, we charge. I mean, students can pay, but also, they pay because it’s useful. If it helps you do something, then sure, the value is worth it.
Are you profitable yet?
No, we’re growing, and I think a part of what we’re doing is just investing in research more than anything else.
What’s your runway?
[Laughs] We’ve been obsessively working on this. I would say over the last 12 to 18 months, the models got to a place where you can actually do very good things with Runway. I think there’s always an optimization function that companies have to run, which is, “Do you want to optimize for whatever is working now, or do you want to keep on growing?” I think for us, we really want to keep on growing. There’s a lot of research we can invest in and a lot of areas of growth that we can keep on going. So, I think the tension right now has always been like, “Do we want to optimize for this, or what’s next?” I think we want to lean into what’s next. I think there are a lot of things we haven’t actually fully discovered that we could do that we want to do.
One question I ask everybody on Decoder: How is Runway structured? How do you organize the company?
It’s very lean. Someone thought the other day that we were 1,000 people, and I thought that that was the best compliment that you could give me. We’re like 100 people or so. It’s very flat, and very focused on autonomy more than anything else. What we do is less of objectives and we actually don’t believe in objectives. We have a way of working where we just set boundaries and where we want people to do research or explore because a lot of what we do has never been done before. So, if I tell you how to get there, I’m probably wrong because we’ve never done it.
So, it’s research. You have to experiment and fail. What we do is we set their constraints and the boundaries on where we want you to experiment. The best outcomes of the research we’ve done have been about setting the right boundaries and then letting people go, letting people work on their own, and figuring out on their own how to do it.
So are you full holacracy, no org chart?
I mean, there’s some org chart in some way, but people collaborate. We have a studio, an internal studio with creatives, producers, and filmmakers working along with research. Those people are sitting at the same table, speaking the same language. They come from different backgrounds, but they managed to collaborate. So, yeah, that’s when you want to promote.
One of the reasons I’m interested in asking that question, particularly of AI companies of your size, is that there is a deep connection to the capabilities of the model, the research that’s being done, and the kinds of products you can build. I haven’t seen a lot of great, focused AI products. Runway actually might be one of them. But in the broad case, there’s ChatGPT, which is just an open-ended interface to a frontier model, and then we’re going to see what happens. Do you think that as you get bigger, the products will get more focused, or do you think you still need the connection between the team building the model and the product teams themselves?
I think the connection between product and model helps the product team better understand what’s coming. So, you need to understand that the way tech used to work was in much lower cycles of R&D. Now, research tends to move in very fast cycles. So, the issue with product, and I think product is one of the hardest things to do right now… You scope the area of product that we work on, design it, and start building it. By the time you build it, it’s obsolete. You’ve basically lost six months of work, or however long it takes you. So, product needs to behave like a research organization.
The way we tell our team is like, look, we have research scientists working on research, but everyone in the company is a scientist because everyone is running experiments. So, before you spend too much time doing something. Run an experiment, build a simple prototype, and understand if it’s worth it. Then, check with research to see if they think the thing you’re working with is going to become useful, or avoid getting submerged by the next generation of models. What happens a lot is that our customers are coming to us with specific questions like, “Hey, the model does this, but it doesn’t do this. Can you build a specific product for that?”
We could build a product just for that, or we could wait for the next generation of models that would just do all of that on the fly. So, that’s the tricky part because you’re always trying to play catch-up. I think companies that understand research are much better positioned than companies that are trying to catch up.
There’s a comparison I keep making here that you’re not going to like, but I’m going to make it anyway. I started covering tech a million years ago, now with gray hair and a beard. When Bluetooth came out, everybody knew what the product was going to be, right? Everybody saw the headsets. Every real estate agent in America had a giant Motorola headset, and it’s like, “Oh, you want AirPods? We want AirPods.” But the standard was just not ready for another decade, and then Apple had to actually build a proprietary layer on top of the standard to make AirPods.
That took a full decade. It was just not ready. There was a real dance there between, “What do we want to build? What’s the product? Can we build it, and does the technology support our goals?” You’re describing the same dynamic. The thing that gets me about what you’re describing is, well, the model’s just going to eat the product over and over and over again. How do you even know what products to build?
Yeah, it’s very hard.
Because everyone can see the AirPods, right? Everyone’s like, “The computer is going to talk to me, it’s going to be fine.”
Yeah, but I think that’s more than just “the computer will talk to me.” I think there are parts of how it will talk to you, and when it uses emotion. There’s a lot of product that goes back into research. I think no one really knows, to be honest, what the future product experience would look like because a lot of the interactions we’re having, we just never thought we could have. So, you’re only going to realize by having people use it. I think that happens a lot in research, where researchers spend so much time retaining and doing all the work, then you put it out, and in two minutes, someone figures out how to use it in a completely different way.
Actually, I think that’s great. It points to the fact that I think the previous generation of software was based on this idea of you choosing a vertical and just going there. I think the next generation of software is based on you choosing a principle of how you want to operate in the world, and you build models towards that. Our principle is that more of the pixels that you will watch will be generated or simulated. That’s the surface that we’re operating on. Therefore, you can go into many different products based on that idea. So, it’s the difference between choosing a vertical and choosing a principle in which you want to operate.
But right now, as you’re deciding what products to build, you’re getting market feedback from users. You have studios using the tool and agencies using the tool. You’ve got to make some decisions.
We do.
Where are we going to fill the gaps of the product, and where are we going to wait? How do you make those decisions?
We focus a lot on research and on understanding what’s coming and what’s worth building. I think there’s always a trade-off, specifically with startups, where if you spend too much time working on the wrong thing, it might actually kill you. I think we listen to users, but sometimes users don’t really know what they want. They know the problems really well, but they can’t articulate the exact solution for it. So, you don’t find yourself building exactly what they’re describing because they can’t describe the thing that they don’t know it’s coming.
So, I don’t know. I think it’s like art, I guess. You become just really good at intuition and being like, “Okay, that thing, even if it could be a great deal now, we’re not going to do it right now.” So I think companies overall build intuition, and that’s just experience of doing it enough times and then saying no. You have to say no a lot of times. Customers come with great ideas, but just say no. Not because you don’t think you can solve for them, but again, because it will trap you into the wrong thing for the wrong reason.
This is the other question I ask everybody broadly. How do you make decisions? What’s your framework?
How do I make decisions? What kind of decisions?
All of them.
I think there are different decisions. There are decisions that are much more long-term and irreversible, and decisions that are much more reversible. I think we’re very much of the idea that, again, run experiments and be willing to understand if you are wrong in your assumptions. If you need to make a decision, do it because you’re confident it will work.
If it doesn’t, you can change your mind. Sometimes, product decisions come from that taste component. I think overall taste has become a good way of directing the company, I would say, from how we operate in marketing and how we hire. I don’t think there’s one particular framework, but just the overall idea of taste and intuition has become clear in how we make decisions.
Do you think you’re going to have to change that as you hit the next set of scale? At 100 people, you can be like, “Just listen to me.” With 1,000 people, maybe not.
That’s the thing we keep referring to is the idea of a “company company.” We don’t want to be a “company company.” A “company company” is a company that behaves like a company because that’s the way companies behave. You’re like, “No, don’t do that. Be a company that’s focused on solving a problem, a research constraint, or a user need. Don’t focus on the things that are superficial that you’re supposed to be doing just because you’re a company.”
Because the moment you lose that, you’re dead. You’re going to stop innovating. You’re going to focus on the wrong things to optimize for. I think just culture, maybe, reinforces this to the team. I still interview everyone in the company. I’m still pretty much involved in how we make decisions on product. Organizations tend to seek slow velocity if they’re not constantly pushing all the time.
Do you think there’s going to come a point where the split between the capabilities of the underlying model slows down, and that you have to put more into product?
Maybe, but I don’t think we’re close to that. Even if we stop research now, like we decide collectively to stop research, I think there are 10 to 20 years of innovations that are just there, latent, waiting for someone to discover them. I don’t think we’re at that point yet where you can say, “Hey, this is enough,” because I think there’s just too much space to grow and have models to think. We just released a model two weeks ago, and I’m not kidding. Every day, I open our users on Twitter and Instagram, and there’s a new use case. Now, just before coming here, someone was using it for clothes.
So, you can try on anything. You basically go to any shop online, like an eCommerce site, upload a photo of yourself, and see yourself wearing that in a hyperrealistic manner. I just never thought you could use it for that, and you can. So, yeah.
I was talking to Kevin Scott, the CTO of Microsoft, and he made the same point in a slightly different way. He said there are more capabilities in the models we have today than anyone knows what to do with.
I agree.
To me, it’s like, “Well, then we should start building products that make sense.” But then the tension is whether the next-generation models are just going to eat my product. When does that get stable enough so anybody can make products that are good?
So here’s a great example. That’s a great distinction between verticals and principles. If you think about a vertical, then you’ll choose a solution and you’ll build towards that. If you think about a principle, you should assume that many of the things that we’re trying to build into the product will eventually become features of new models. Therefore, your product should be many layers ahead if you want to spend time on it. So, their principles should be, for example, image generation, zero-shot.
So, zero-shot learning (ZSL) means if you want to model to do something, you don’t have to train it. You need to just show it examples. You can widely expand the range of things models can do if you have the right examples. So, maybe a good idea is to find and collect examples of things you can teach models for, and then it changes the way you can approach product. I think that the distinction between principles and verticals is relevant for that.
One of the big trends in the industry is that the cost of every new model is getting exponentially higher. Sam Altman is touring the capitals of the world, being like, “Can I have $1 trillion?” Maybe he’ll get it. You never know. He might get it.
Yeah, maybe.
Are you on the same cost curve where every new model is that much more expensive?
Do you have $1 trillion?
Is the answer yes?
If you have one. So, I think AI tends to move in two ways. There’s an expansion wave and an optimization wave. Expansion is like, well, we’re discovering what we could do. If you think about the models from two or three years ago, yeah, they were expensive. Now, most of those models can be trained on your laptop because models have gone into a state where you can optimize them. One thing engineers love is optimizing things. So, if you tell them, here’s the thing that works, optimize it, people will go very hard on it. For some models that are two or three years old, now that’s the case.
They’re very cheap to train from scratch. I think there are new models that are still in the expansion phase. We haven’t figured out exactly how to optimize them, but we will. But the thing that happens is the same thing if you spend too much time optimizing them; the trade-off is going to stop working on the new expansion. I think most companies these days are betting on expanding. So, they’re betting on paying more for the sake of expanding that and not falling behind, rather than trying to optimize and reduce the cost of the thing that works.
Where are you?
I think we’re on the expansion side. Having the ability to expand that, having the ability to innovate on that, it’s way harder. And then having the ability to just catch up and play the optimization game is easier. I think our bet is like, well, this is the advantage point where you can keep on moving things and just pushing boundaries.
The big platform companies, Microsoft, Google, Amazon, and OpenAI — which has a deal with Microsoft — run their own hyperscalers. Is that a competitive threat to you? Is that an advantage to you?
Well, Google is an investor, so we work closely with them. Again, they’re different functions of businesses. If you’re a hyperscaler, you’re probably in the business of optimizing things. You need to make things cheap and scalable for everyone. It’s a different function from a research lab, which is building new things. So, again, it’s probably good to pair the two. Because if you have a good research lab without optimization, then there’s a transfer you can make technology-wise that will allow companies to just run on the things, sell them, and then get feedback. This is while the other part of the company is working on the next thing, which is where we are.
If Google’s an investor, you’re running on [Google Cloud Platform]?.
That’s correct.
So do you just let them buy the Nvidia H100s? Do you worry about that at all?
Nvidia is also an investor.
The AI industry is full of this, by the way. It’s very obvious.
Well, I think it’s people who have seen this, and I think you want to provoke this. Many of the things we’re discussing now weren’t that obvious eight years ago until many people started to make the right bets on it. I think again, depending on where you are, it might be a good function to partner with people who get it and who want to work with you long-term. I think the people we work with can help us get to that point. Yeah.
I think Nvidia as an investor is one of those things about the AI industry that is very funny, right? They’re investing in the applications that drive the usage of their chips and all these places. Maybe some of them will pay off, and maybe they won’t. That’s the nature of investing, but at some point, everything has to add up to actually deliver a return for Nvidia. Do you feel that pressure that Runway has to be a big enough business to justify all of the infrastructure expenses?
I think that justification comes from the value you see with customers and the adoption that you see. I think that’s how you see AI in products go from zero to many millions of revenue in a couple of weeks or months, something that was unseen before. It’s because it is such a different experience, it’s such a different value that if you’re ambitious about it. I think yeah, it will definitely get there. We’re already seeing this. Still, video, for example, is very early. Gen-4, our latest model, is literally a month and a half old. So, most of the world hasn’t experienced it yet. It’s also a distribution problem. How do you get to everyone out there who can use it?
Are you at millions in revenue?
Yeah, more than that.
Do you have a path to billions in revenue?
We hope, yeah, over the next couple of years.
I’m asking because all these companies have to generate billions in revenue for all these investments.
I think they will. Many will. I mean, again, think about different first principles. If you’re in the business of ads or movie-making, you’re spending hundreds of millions of dollars to make one movie. If I can take that process and help you do it for a couple of million, then all the delta, I can literally charge for whatever delta I’m helping you improve. Hopefully, I can charge you way less, so you can actually do more. If you expand that, then you’re also not helping them, but you’re expanding the window of who can do that thing in the first place.
Because if you think about professional filmmaking, it’s a very niche, small industry, mostly because it’s very expensive. Well, if I have something that makes it cheaper, then I can expand their definition of who can get into the industry in the first place. From a market perspective, that’s great because you’ve got many more people who can do something that they never thought they could.
The film industry is really interesting. It’s under a lot of pressure, so much pressure that HBO Max just keeps renaming itself every six months to get whatever attention it can. It’s great.
It works, I guess.
But fundamentally, they’re competing with TikTokers and YouTubers, right? Netflix knows this. Netflix knows that YouTube is its biggest competition. The cost to make a YouTube video is already only a fraction of the cost to make a Marvel movie, and that has basically put the movie industry under a ton of pressure. Do you think AI can actually shrink that gap and keep the quality high?
Yeah, so I think that’s the point. I think the last frontier was low-quality content that anyone could make. I think that’s TikTok and YouTube. There are billions of people out there making everything. The difference between that and a high-production studio is the quality of the content, the output, and how good the output of the pixels and the videos is. That, for me, is mostly a technical barrier. It’s not a storytelling one. It’s not an idea one. Making a high-end science fiction movie is really expensive because you have to hire so many people and work with software that is very expensive. So the last frontier I would say for us, and I think many media companies, is billions of people making high-end content.
That is the one idea that I think if you’re in the traditional business of media and you haven’t realized that yet, you’re probably very scared because then you’ll compete with anyone in any part of the world who has a small budget, very good ideas, and can make amazing things. We’re already seeing this. The Academy Award for animation this year, I don’t know if you’ve seen it, went to a a movie called Flow. Very small budget, I think less than $10 million. It was just a very good group of people working with great software, and they won the Academy Award against $100 or $200 million productions. It’s just because you have very smart, talented people working with the right software tools.
So the flip side of this is those studios are also jealously protective of their IP. That’s the thing that they monetize. They window it into different distribution channels and into different regions. They sue pirates who steal it on BitTorrent. You trained on a lot of this content. There’s reporting that Runway trained on a bunch of YouTube channels, including The Verge‘s, by the way. There’s your $1 trillion.
This is, in my mind, the single greatest threat to the already exorbitant cost structure of the AI industry. There are lawsuits everywhere that might say you have to pay all of those creators for their work. Have you thought about that risk?
I think it’s part of how we analyze and how we work. We’ve worked with different studios and companies to understand how to train the models for the needs that they have and what they want to do. Still, it’s crucial for me to help everyone understand what these models are actually doing. A lot of the assumptions that we get around AI video are that you type in a prompt and you get a movie. Now it happens less often, but I used to get a lot of scripts in my inbox where people would say, “Hey, I’m a producer or a writer. I’ve been working on this show. I have the whole script done. It’s great. I heard you do AI videos. So here’s the script, make my movie.”
I’ve realized a lot of people thought that what AI video, AI pixel generation, or making videos with AI meant was that you type in a prompt and you get the entire movie that you thought you were going to get. No, it doesn’t work like that. It will probably never work like that. You’re still pretty much involved. You need to tell the model how to use it. You need to tell the model the directions and the inputs you want to use. I think part of it is that perhaps most people’s experiences with AI over the last 12 months have been through chatbots. So the idea of AI has been condensed to this idea of chatbots.
If you have a chatbot, you have AI, and those things are summarizing a huge field into a very oversimplified concept. So when you think about copyright and you think about creating things, I think all the weight is still in what you are making. You’re still in control, and these are not tools that will make things on their own. You are the one deciding how to make them in a way. So you have to be responsible in how you use them. That’s basically the point.
But to train the model, you need to ingest a huge amount of data. The two things that make the models more effective in an expansion mode are more compute and more data. Have you thought about whether you’re going to have to pay for the data you ingested into the model?
So we’ve done partnerships to get data that we need in particular ways, but again, it’s really important to understand that these models are not trying to replicate the data. I think the common misconception is that people make is that you can type in a scene of a movie and you get the scene of that movie in Runway. These are not databases. They’re not storing the data. They’re learning. They’re students learning about data, getting patterns within that data, and they use that to create something net new. So the argument that I think is really important to consider is that these systems are creating net-new things, specifically for videos. They’re creating net-new everything pixels.
The way you use them should be in a responsible way, of course. The models are not trying to store anything. So that for me is the distinction because it changes the argument of how you think about training models in the first place. If you think about them as databases, you’re going to have a set of different assumptions, use cases, and concerns than if you think about them as general-purpose tools like a camera. I always think of Runway as a camera. A camera allows you to do anything you want. It’s up to you how you want to use it. You can get in trouble for using a camera, or you can make a great film by using a camera. So, you choose.
It’s shockingly easy to get in trouble for using a camera.
[Laughs] Yeah, I know. I grew up in Chile. There are a lot of films I didn’t manage to see [in theaters], and the way I saw them was that I bought them as bootlegs on street corners. I don’t know if you’ve ever seen one of those where people stand in the theater and just record the thing. I mean that was a bad use of cameras, but I think the overall assumption as a society was like, “Let’s not ban cameras. Let’s actually have a norm in theaters where you can’t do that. If you do, you’re going to get in trouble.” I think we all agree that that’s a good thing to do.
That argument is weaving its way through the legal system right now. There are lots and lots of court cases. The last time we went through this, it was basically Google that won a bunch of court cases about building databases. But Google was a friendly young company that had slides in the office; people wore beanies when they went to work.
The inherent utility of Google’s structure was very obvious to every judge. The inherent utility of YouTube, which got in a lot of trouble, was very obvious to every judge. They horsepower their way through it. They had to pay some money to some people, and they had to win some cases. They had to invest a lot into litigation, and they won because they were cute and they were Google. It was a very different time.Tech companies are not broadly thought of as young and cute anymore. No one thinks of Meta, Amazon, and Google as adorable companies that should build the future the way that they were at the time.
Have you thought about the risk that they might lose these cases and what that would do to your business? Because this dynamic you’re talking about — whether this is a non-infringing use, whether there’s broad utility here — this argument goes back to the Betamax case in the ’80s. It’s all there, but it doesn’t have to go the way that it always did, right? Judges are just a bunch of people, as we’ve discovered here in America. They just make decisions. What if it doesn’t go your way?
Yeah, again, it’s hard for me to have an opinion on every single case out there. I think it’s more complex than that. I think Google has had a great impact on the world at large. I think it’s hard to disagree on that. I think the world has gotten way more expansive. Information has become more accessible to many. I think that’s hard to disagree with, right? I think there are definitely new challenges with every new technology. I don’t disagree with that. I mean, you are putting really powerful technology in the hands of everyone, which means everyone, right? So there are use cases around AI that you should be preventing, and you should try to make sure you have systems of regulation and safety on top. I think every company is different.
One thing I’ve really learned about tech, and I mentioned this as an artist… I went to art school, and I started working on tech mostly as a way to develop my vision of how art should work with tech. That was my idea. So I still consider myself an outsider to tech, and I think one thing I would consider is that not everyone operates in the same way. I think not all companies are the same. Companies tend to be different in how they operate, and I think there are different ways of managing through this change. It’s hard for me to group everyone in the same group and say, “Yeah, all tech companies are basically doing the same thing.”
Let me try this a different way. You trained on YouTube channels, right?
We train on a variety of different data sets, and so we have teams working on image, video, text, and audio. We don’t disclose how we train our models because that’s unique to, I guess, our research.
Did you train on YouTube?
Again, we have a variety of different data sets that we use to train our models, depending on the task. It’s not about, “Do we train on this, on that?” We have agreements with different companies. We have partnerships with others. The way we train is very unique to us. It’s very competitive over there, so we’re probably never going to tell how we do it because it’s very unique to how we train our models.
YouTubers own the copyrights to their videos. If it comes out that you trained on YouTube and hundreds of YouTubers come asking you for money at whatever rates, is the financial model of Runway still tenable?
I guess it goes back to what these models are doing, right?
Well, I’m saying that if OpenAI loses its case against the New York Times and training on the Times’ content is found to be infringing, the floodgates will open. It is not clear if OpenAI will win or lose. If Meta loses its cases against the book publishers — and it’s not doing great in the past couple of weeks — the floodgates are open. If those floodgates open, is your business tenable?
I think again, summarizing the entire AI industry as chatbots and what one company is doing, I think, is a mistake. I think, again, video and media work very differently, and there are a lot of other considerations. A lot of the assumptions around how AI works that I’ve seen about video are based on opinions about cell phones in 1992. You’re just probably very early on seeing the impact of how that technology will change the industry, and probably you’ve never experienced it before. So, I think part of what is going to happen over time is that a lot of these ideas around concern for copyright and other considerations will start to change as people understand how this actually works. I’ll give you an example.
I was at a dinner with a producer of a major show, one you’ve all probably seen. He was like, “I’m very anti-AI.” I said, “Okay, why are you anti-AI?” He’s like, “Well, because it works like this and it does this.” I was like, “No, it doesn’t. Let me show you how it works.” Then we showed him how it works, and he was like, “Yeah, now I’m on board.” It took me like 25 minutes. I think he was very adamant about his position of being very against AI because I realized he just had the wrong expectations about what it did. I think it was a minute of like, okay, let me show you what it does. It’s like you’ve never experienced this before.
We forgot this, but we all had to go through training to send our first email. People were just telling you how to send an email, and you have to go through it. You don’t just understand it, and so you start using it. You understand the limitations of it and the constraints of it, and then you start using it. I think a lot of the hard takes on AI these days are based on just the right expectations and the wrong assumptions of what it actually does.
That gap between how artists feel about AI and how much they actually use it seems like it’s getting bigger every day. It shows up on our site at The Verge. By the way, The Verge is built on the very foundation that I was right about my opinions about cell phones in 1992.
[Laughs] One of few.
But we see it, right? The people read the articles. I talk to product people at other companies. With Adobe, for example, the usage rate of generative AI in Adobe products is basically 100%. Generative fill is used as often as layers, which means everyone uses it every day, and then the audience is like, “I hate this. Make it go away.” There’s just this gap. It’s a moral gap. It’s a psychological gap, whatever it is. There’s a gap between how people are using it, how they talk about it, and how they feel about it, particularly with creatives and artists. I know you spend a lot of time with creatives. How are you closing that gap? Is it possible to close that gap?
I don’t see that gap that often. I think in film, there’s the idea of below the line and above the line. If you speak with a VFX artist, someone who’s actually moving the pixels on a screen, they don’t have weekends. They’ve never had a weekend off because when you’re on a project, it’s a very tough timeline with very small budgets. The director comes with notes, and you have to take the notes. It’s a Friday, and there goes your weekend. You’re going to be working on pushing those edits every day, and you’re doing it by hand. So, if you have a tool that allows you to do it faster, of course, you will use it. It’s great.
It will get you where you need to go faster. I think the gap there is not as big as some people might think because the actual creative minds, the producers, the editors, and the VFX artists, are already embracing this. It is very valuable, and I guess I’m not surprised about your stats and numbers. I think still… Above the line, the people who think about creatives as, “Oh, I have never had the experience actually working and seeing it,” might have a different assumption of how it works. Again, I think part of it is just that we need to show you how it actually works. Something we do is… We have a film festival here in New York, by the way, if anyone here wants to go. We’ve done it for three years now. It’s in the Lincoln Center. It’s a major event. It gathers filmmakers from all over the world.
We started the festival with 300 submissions. This year, we got 6,000 submissions. We work with the American Cinema Editors, which is one of the guilds of the editors, and we work with the Tribeca Film Festival, so the industry partners. It’s a great way of understanding how it’s actually being used in real production use cases and how valuable it is for not only the insiders but also the new voices. I think part of the gap is that you need to go to a film festival to experience it, and you’ll probably get a sense of how useful it is.
The concern from that class of people that we hear all the time is, “This is great. It made everyone’s life a little bit easier. It also puts half of us out of work.” Do you see that as a real threat or as a real outcome?
I understand the concern, but I think the obsession should be on people more than jobs. We used to have people who pressed buttons in elevators. That was a job. I don’t know if you guys remember this. That was a job. There was a job of people throwing stones to wake you up before alarm clocks were invented. I think no one is saying we should protect people who throw rocks because of their job. We should have alarm clocks, and the person who’s throwing rocks to wake you up should be taught how to do something else. So, you focus on the people and how you upskill, upgrade, learn, and teach people to do new things rather than like, “Hey, let’s keep this thing because we need people pressing buttons in elevators, and that’s a job.”
I think that has happened in Hollywood many times. In the beginning, Hollywood was silent. There were silent movies. Talkies came around. It was a major breakthrough where you could actually have sound in movies. The industry revolted. Charles Chaplin was one of the biggest advocates against films with sound because he said that sound would just kill the essence of filmmaking. An argument that they had was like, “Who’s going to pay the orchestras that are playing in the theaters?”
Well, it’s true. Yeah, we don’t need orchestras in theaters anymore. But also, the technology gave birth to an entirely new industry of artists. Hans Zimmer, that was the beginning of an entirely new industry given by technology. I think this is, for me, very similar, where yes, we’re going to lose some jobs. Our job should be to train those people to do new things with technology.
Last question. If you had to spin that all the way out, you’re successful; the AI industry can pull this off. The models get the capabilities you want them to have. What does the film industry look like 10 years from now?
I think it looks very much like…
It’s not just TikTok? Are we just going to do Quibi?
[Laughs] No, I mean, if someone likes making that, I don’t think there’s anything wrong with it. I think there are many independent voices out there who have never had the chance to tell their stories because they don’t have the means to tell them. Our vision of Runway is that the best stories have yet to be told. We haven’t heard from the greatest storyteller in the world because maybe they just weren’t born in LA.
That probably is the case, and so I think we’re going to see a much more democratized version of film. We’re going to have a version of storytelling that’s for everyone, and the bar for it will be the ideas. It won’t be who you know in the industry or how much money you have. It’ll be how good the thing you want to say is and how good you are at saying it.
Well, Cris, this has been amazing. You’re going to have to come back on Decoder soon.
Of course. Thank you for having me.
Questions or comments about this episode? Hit us up at decoder@theverge.com. We really do read every email!
]]>Today, I’m talking with Airbnb CEO Brian Chesky. This is Brian’s fourth time on the show, and he’s one of my favorite guests because he’s so clearly obsessed with things like company structure, design, and decision-making. You know, Decoder stuff.
We had Brian on the show last fall to talk about “founder mode,” a buzzy phrase inspired by a talk that Brian gave about his detail-oriented management style. As we were walking out of the studio, Brian told me he had some big news he was incredibly excited about but couldn’t tell me about yet. That news was a redesign of the Airbnb app with a striking new design language; new curated experiences in various cities, some led by celebrities and athletes; and a whole new services feature that lets you book things like private chefs and photographers.
You’ll hear Brian describe all this as a full-scale rethink of Airbnb, everything from how individual properties are stored in the company’s databases to how the actual company is structured, or changed, in order to get to where he wants to be five years from now.
Listen to Decoder, a show hosted by The Verge’s Nilay Patel about big ideas — and other problems. Subscribe here!
That would be a great episode of Decoder all on its own. But if you’ve been listening to the past few episodes, you know that I’m particularly interested in what happens to services like Airbnb, Uber, and DoorDash as new kinds of AI assistants and agents get more popular. Google just announced new agent features in Chrome and in various research prototypes, Microsoft is rapidly pushing on some of the core technologies to make agentic systems happen, and there are lots and lots of demos and test projects out there showing off what the next generation of automation might be able to accomplish.
But all of those things disintermediate service providers — after all, if you can just ask an AI assistant to bring you interesting vacation listings, get you a ride to the airport, or book a private chef, you might never actually open that beautiful new Airbnb app and see all the new things they’re trying to sell you to grow their business. So Brian and I talked about this quite a bit. This will be the next set of high-stakes negotiations in tech and business, and it’s clear he’s been thinking about it a lot.
It also wouldn’t be a Brian Chesky episode if I didn’t take the time to ask him about OpenAI and its CEO, Sam Altman — Brian is close friends with Sam, and he was a part of the drama that saw Sam fired and brought back to the company last year. He also introduced Sam and Jony Ive — an introduction that led to Jony taking over all design responsibility at OpenAI. So I did my best to see if Brian would reveal anything about what they’re all working on. You can tell me how well I did.
There is a lot going on in this one. At one point, Brian explains the difference between a product manager and a program manager by talking about architects and general contractors. It’s pure Decoder bait through and through.
Okay: Airbnb CEO Brian Chesky. Here we go.
This interview has been lightly edited for length and clarity.
Brian Chesky, you’re the cofounder and CEO of Airbnb. Welcome back to your fourth time on Decoder.
I love being here.
I’m very excited to talk to you. I’ve always enjoyed talking to you about management and running companies and strategy. You have very different ideas from a lot of the folks we talk to. It’s always interesting. And then there’s news. There’s big news that I want to talk about. You were last on the show back in October, and as we were walking out and you were getting on the elevator, you said, “I’ve got something really big. I can’t wait to come back and talk to you about it.” And that happened. You’ve launched Airbnb Experiences. You’ve launched all kinds of new services on Airbnb. Tell us what’s going on.
The story, just the short version, started 17 years ago when we hosted three guests that first weekend, and that really inspired the creation of this company. Something remarkable happened. These three strangers came into our home and we rented our space to them, but we also hung out with them all weekend. And as we’re waving them goodbye, I remember Joe [Gebbia] and I — we were roommates — were thinking there was a bigger idea here, but the bigger idea was not merely just renting your space. The bigger idea was what happens when strangers come together, and what if you could build this people-to-people marketplace where people could share not only their home but every part of their lives. And years later, once Airbnb took off, people asked me, “Well, what’s next for Airbnb? You’ve already monetized people’s biggest asset, their home. What’s next, their car?”
I started thinking to myself, I don’t believe the biggest asset in people’s lives is their home. It’s their time. There was a book written about Amazon called The Everything Store, but it probably should be parenthetically called “Everything in a Cardboard Box Store.” It’s not actually everything, and in fact, more and more of the economy is moving to services and eventually experiences, and we just thought this was an incredible opportunity for the company because when it comes to travel, more people stay in hotels than homes. One of the top reasons they like hotels is there’s a lot of services and comforts. We thought, “What if we could provide all the services in a hotel and more at a home?” And then we thought people travel to do things, but it’s hard to do really cool, authentic things even though people travel to have local travel experiences.
So we wanted to bring back Airbnb Experiences but in a whole different way. So we’ve announced a few things. Number one is Airbnb Services, to make your stay more special. You can Airbnb a chef to come to your home. You can Airbnb a masseuse, a personal trainer, a photographer to take your photos. Then we relaunched Airbnb Experiences, bringing in some of the most interesting people in the world. You can do these really cool activities with them. And then for the third thing we said, “Well, we want to make it really easy.”
Our app was designed to do one thing, which is book a home. And so we had to completely reimagine our app to not only book a home but book a service and experience. Well, along the way, we basically rebuilt our technology stack, rebuilt an entire app to become a platform that could book almost anything. In the process, we also created a whole new design language. We’ve departed from this flat design that I think was popular about 10 years ago on the internet, to this really cool, robust, dimensional, vibrant interface. It’s kind of the beginning of a whole new company. And I think this is just the beginning of the next chapter for Airbnb.
I have a lot of questions for you about the design aspects of this. We’re going to come to that. It’s interesting you talk about monetizing people’s time and then the actual services in the app. I think you’re starting with chefs. Private chefs are an industry, and it’s not like I’m a pretty good cook so I will come to your house in the way that I might have a room in my apartment and I’ll let you rent that for a day or two.
There’s a little bit of a gap there. Are you expecting most of the services to be provided by professionals who use Airbnb for discovery, or are you expecting it eventually to just be regular people providing whatever things they want to do in their extra time?
I think it really depends. I think with services it’s primarily going to be people who are professionals, and we’re going to give them a platform. We vet everyone. We make sure they have licenses. We make sure they have certifications, but it’s good to remember, a huge part of the American economy is a service economy, and I think a lot of the people in services have fairly unsteady incomes. They have unsteady demand. It’s very much word of mouth. You don’t know who’s great. There’s not a system of trust. I think what we’ve created is a system of trust where we can vet everyone and make sure they’re really, really excellent; our brand stands for quality, and that’s really where we want to go. I think experiences are a little different, because we want really interesting people, but for many of the experiences the hosts have never done this before.
For example, I was just on a photo tour with a photographer who’s got a million followers on Instagram, but he’s not a tour guide. But he takes you around SoHo to look at all the cast-iron architecture and teaches you how to take photos. Now, he’s not a professional tour guide. He’s never done this before. So I think there is this opportunity to take people with a skill and monetize it. I think down the road there could be ways to take this to even more casual people as well.
I’m one of these people. This is a very common story in New York where it was cheaper to buy a house in the Catskills in 2016 than to buy an apartment in New York City. So I bought a house in the Catskills. We ran it as our own Airbnb for a minute and then the pandemic happened and we moved into that house by accident for two years. This is a very cliche story. I apologize to the audience. If you live in this city, you’ve heard this story a million times and everywhere else it sounds insane. But then we moved in and then we left and as we left I thought, “Well, now I have a kid. I’m not going to have this side hustle of running this Airbnb.”
We turned it over to a professional management company, and it just runs the Airbnb for us and it’s great. It takes a cut and it’s fine, and it seems to be going well. But there’s a part here that’s a lot of what Airbnb has become. The actual experience is people’s homes, but they’re managed by professional vendors because they do a good job of it. They’re consistent. They manage the platform on behalf of whoever owns the houses. Are you expecting that layer to emerge in the services category as well?
Hard to say, but I don’t anticipate it. There’s a couple of points there. One of the things and one of the reasons we launched what we launched is, and I could go in really interesting places with this conversation, when people think of Airbnb, most people think of homes and of empty homes, homes you get all to yourself. And that is most of what we do every single day. We have nearly 4 million people a night staying in homes. In the vast majority of the homes, the host isn’t there, and a large percentage of them are using third-party services to help them, not the majority but a bunch of them. I think that in the future, I want Airbnb to be a bit more of a real community where you’re actually connecting with the host, and with services. I don’t think these things get industrialized.
If you want to get a chef to come to your home, you’re still going to get a chef. It’s going to be a real person. If you’re going to go on an experience with somebody, it’s still going to be a real person. I think we, the company, can provide a lot of that platform layer, but I do think that most of this is going to be peer-to-peer, person-to-person. I also think that if I were to zoom out for a second, I think we’re in a really, really interesting time in the world with Silicon Valley and tech. I think I heard the average Gen Zer is spending four hours a day on social media. I think AI is an incredibly exciting tool. Probably the most powerful tool developed in our lifetime or many lifetimes. Maybe the way to think about AI is as an accelerator. It’s an accelerator of the path we’re probably already on, and the path we’re already on is people spending a lot of time on devices, a lot of time living in a digital world, a lot of time consuming content.
I remember more than 15 years ago, 20 years ago, there was a thing called social networking. And it’s funny, that term doesn’t really exist anymore because around 2012, your friends became your followers and social networking became social media, and so then connecting became performing and the relationships became kind of parasocial. I’m not saying this is a bad thing, but what’s clear is that there’s now a void, and there’s a void in people’s lives, which is people living in the real world, making real connections with real people, having real experiences, real memories, and this is where I’d like to take the company. I really want Airbnb to start to feel like more of a social network in the real world. We’ve made these experiences really social. I think it can be the platform to meet one another, to connect, and just to build this entire ecosystem around people, their passions, their skills, their time.
So you’re starting with 10 services. I think chefs are the first and the rest are, as you announced at the event keynote, you basically pointed at hotels. Here’s all the stuff hotels do, and then there’s some other stuff like photographers. How’d you pick those 10?
We basically just did a bunch of surveys with our guests and asked them, “What kind of services do you want to use at your Airbnb?” There were a few around food: chefs, prepared meals, and catering. We noticed that people were booking entire homes. The homes come with really big kitchens. Not everyone wants to cook, and so the kitchen is often not used. So, what if somebody could come make food for you?
Photography was a very, very popular request on Airbnb, because we have a network of thousands of professional photographers. We photograph all these really wonderful homes on Airbnb that look really well when photographed. So, with a network of thousands of professional photographers, we thought, “What if we allowed that network to take photos on your trip?” We noticed one of the most shared types of photos or even videos on Instagram and TikTok were of travel. Travel photos, travel experiences, but people struggle to take really good photos.
One of the problems if you’re traveling with your family is you can’t really take a family photo unless one of you is not in it, unless you give your camera to somebody else. Then we thought about nails, makeup, and hair. Why would we do those? Well, a lot of people travel for special occasions, like weddings or other events, and so a lot of people need these services, and it can be really difficult. Let’s just imagine you live in New York and you’re going to Chicago and you need to get all these services. How would you find them? So this was kind of where we started. I think eventually, who knows, there could be literally hundreds of services that we could offer. The real question is could Airbnb one day go beyond travel? Could you use Airbnb to find services in your own city? And I don’t see why that’s not possible down the road.
We just had Dara Khosrowshahi from Uber on the show. He was talking about a similar shift for that app, where I think of Uber as the button that just brings you a Toyota Camry anywhere in the world, which was very difficult to pull off. It’s a simple thing to say. It’s very hard to do.
Now, Uber’s moving toward wanting you to use the app every day — it wants you to schedule rides and have this ongoing relationship with this platform as opposed to “I need a Toyota Camry, I’m going to push this button.” It sounds like you’re making a similar move, right? You might use Airbnb a couple of times a year now as you travel. You want people to use it every day.
Ultimately, what we really want to do is just be useful in people’s lives and be able to solve problems better than anyone else. If we can do that, we want to do that. Right now people use us to book one thing once or twice a year — a home. It turns out though that we’ve done 90 percent of the work to be able to go into a hundred other businesses. Not to say it’s not a lot of work to build those businesses, but from a platform standpoint, we’ve built this reputation system. We have these really robust profiles. We have 200 million verified identities. We handle more than $90 billion flowing through the platform every year. We’ve got one of the best design application teams in the world to make this product ostensible.
So I paid a lot of attention to Amazon, and Amazon in the late ’90s was a bookseller, as you recall. I’m not sure Jeff Bezos had the ambition at that moment — maybe he did — but he certainly went to these adjacencies, and the adjacencies were CDs and DVDs. Then he went to electronics to play them and then he went to toys and then the rest is history. I think there was this opportunity for us to be much more than a marketplace for vacation rentals and homes, and I think at the highest level what I want us to build is a community. Not just a marketplace, but a global community where you can literally travel anywhere, get anything you need for traveling, live anywhere, get anything you need in the real world, and essentially belong and connect with people anywhere.
So travel, live, and belong. I think that’s where we’re going to go. I think it’s probably a five-year journey to get there. I don’t want to say we’ve done most of the work from a technology application standpoint, but we’ve rebuilt the technology and rebuilt the application from the ground up to make it extensible enough to offer really anything.
You launched riffs on some of these ideas before Experiences had been around. I think you had virtual experiences in the pandemic. You started testing experiences I think in 2014. What gives you the confidence that you’re going to pull it off this time?
It’s one of those things where sometimes if something doesn’t work the first time you ask, “Was it a bad idea or was it just…” There’s this great saying by Marc Andreessen, who was one of our early investors. He said, “There’s no ideas, just ideas that are too early.” And he basically made the comment that almost every idea that filled in the .com is now a popular app. Webvan is now basically Instacart and / or DoorDash. I’ve always believed there was a consumption from physical goods to services to eventually experiences and experiences at the top of the pyramid. I think that with social media, people want to share experiences. Social media influencers want to make extra money. How does a social media person, how does an influencer get paid right now? They build a huge audience and they do essentially paid promotions, or they try to parlay into creating a product.
One of the big things we notice is a lot of these really influential people, they don’t want to just broadcast and monetize attention. We think we can monetize their experience. And so we started seeing that. We thought the timing was right. Post-pandemic, people are looking for things to do. Social media is a great distribution channel. We have a huge audience, we have the capability to pull this off and people love experiences on Airbnb. They just didn’t really know about them.
So we’ve completely reimagined the product from the ground up. I think the big difference this time is we’re not going after traditional tour operators. We’re trying to find some of the most interesting people in culture around the world, like Olympians to do workouts with. It turns out this could be fairly scalable. We can get Michelin chefs to do cooking classes with you. So many people, I think in the future, are going to be offering experiences or going on experiences, and we just zoom out and say, “What are people going to do in the future?”
It’s pretty obvious we’re going to use more devices, and these devices are going to get more powerful and we’re going to be able to live in these digital worlds. That’s obvious. The question is, well, what else are we going to do? I think we’re going to use these devices to live in the physical world, and what jobs will AI not replace? I think that AI is not going to replace all these jobs that are people-to-people oriented, that are rooted in connection, rooted in skill, rooted in having an experience. So I think many times you want to either bet on a trend, or almost bet on the opposite of the trend, which is to say bet on the gap that a trend makes. If you’re betting on AI and the world being digitized, you also want to bet on this gap in the world, this huge void. People are going to need things to do, they’re going to need ways to make money. So I think this could be a whole new economy that could emerge.
You’re talking about curating the experiences that exist. The initialist is pretty fun. There’s a Patrick Mahomes experience, there’s something called the Otaku Hottie experience.
[Laughs] With Megan Thee Stallion.
I’m definitely signing up for that one. That’s a lot of input into the system. The benefit of traditional Airbnb is people put up their houses, you can get reviews, you’ve already built the system for that marketplace. People show up at houses and the house is not a variable. The house can’t have a bad day. Maybe it’s dirty and that’ll tank your reviews, but Megan Thee Stallion can have a bad day. There’s a variability to that experience. How do you defend against that?
Part of that is why we’re doing so much quality vetting. And I think in general, and I’ve talked about this a little bit in other conversations we’ve had, we have this philosophy and I learned this philosophy during Y Combinator. Paul Graham had this philosophy. He said, “Do things that don’t scale.” He said, “It’s better to have a hundred people love you than a million people sort of like you.” The way you grow something is you focus on just getting a hundred people to love you and maybe it means you do things by hand that seem completely unscalable. And then what you do is once you’ve figured it out, we might call this product market fit, then you use technology and the industrialized part of your brain to figure out how to create systems and software to scale it. We decided to do something similar with Experiences. We decided to try to build it out by hand.
We wanted to build out, get some of the biggest icons in the world, get some of the most interesting people in the world to get the network going, to show people what’s possible. And what we want to do is use software and community to scale this. I think it’s going to be a much more curated, hands-on scaling process than the original core business of homes. But it’s almost like the difference between Amazon and eBay, where Amazon did the hard work of building out fulfillment centers, and eBay didn’t, but ultimately, the best experience wins, and I do think with software and technology and community, we can do this.
So what I would imagine going forward is we recruit most of hosts, they come on the platform, it’s very hand curated, and then what we’re building are tools that will be very much assisted by AI, and we’ll get more and more automated to be able to do this, and we’ll get more of the communities reaching out to us to provide more experiences. I mean, for example, like Megan Thee Stallion, Patrick Mahomes, and a lot of other celebrities have reached out to us because of Experiences. But the other thing, and one of the reasons we want to get these celebrities in Airbnb is a lot of people say, “Well, if Megan Thee Stallion could do this, I would want to do this.”
It might be significantly lesser-known people, but it’s something to aspire to. Now, to the point that people can have bad days, I guess that’s what makes it real and authentic. These aren’t cookie-cutter experiences. This is real life, but I think there’s something wonderful about it. I think Airbnb is ultimately not a SKEU, it’s not a standardized product. People are living, they’re breathing, they have good days, they have bad days, but I think it’s really about authenticity, and I think that that connection is what makes it so exciting. That variability is what makes life so rich.
You have a version now, especially as you expand into delivering more and more services of what I’ve started calling the DoorDash problem, where the app is beautiful, now, you’ve invested a lot into the app. I want to talk about the decisions to do that. You want people to use your tool and all of the agentic AI executives who come on this show are like, “You’re just going to have Alexa book you an Airbnb,” and that they’re going to cut you out and this is the dream. You’re just going to say, “I want a sandwich,” and they’re going to go ping the DoorDash API, or they’re literally in some cases going to click around DoorDash’s website on your behalf and DoorDash gets none of the customer relationship.
You have a version of this problem now, right? I’m going to Toronto, get me an Airbnb. Some agent’s going to show up and now you’ve expanded the surface area of the problem. I need a chef. I’m going to go click on the Airbnb website. Have you thought about whether you’re going to work with those agentic AI systems or block them or build your own? Because that seems like the platform change that’s coming that no one has really worked out the business of yet.
I totally agree. First of all, let’s zoom out and ask how we think the future’s going to look. There’s this AI maximalist view that there’s going to be like one or two AI models and one or two applications that rule them all and you use this one app and this one model for everything in the world. If you take that to its logical conclusion, you also start to go to this place where almost one company rules everything, and I think there’s numerous problems with the AI maximalist view that it’s one company to rule them all. One problem with it is, I don’t know if everyone wants one company to have total power and primacy, but the other is just one company is not going to build the entire future. This entire future is going to be built by millions of people in thousands or even millions of companies.
There’s an alternative view, which is to say that AI can democratize the world. It’s almost like when technology stagnates the world consolidates, and when there’s this campaign explosion of technology that could actually create a lot more startups. I think that’s another alternative. I do think that every company is going to have to be an AI company or risk disintermediation. The models that are being developed we have access to as well. I think there’s a couple of things that are going to play out here. Number one, I think Airbnb will in and of itself be an AI application. We’re hiring really great people. I think we have one of the best software design teams in the world. We have great application layer design, and I think we can broaden and broaden our app. That’s partly what we’re trying to do.
The more companies become a platform, the more it’s the reason to go directly to that company. I think service experiences are just the beginning of things we can do on Airbnb. Also, I think Airbnb is a community, so you want to be able to connect with the guests and hosts. Our messaging platform is really important. The sense of trust is really, really critical. So number one, I think Airbnb is going to be like a concierge for your traveling, for your life, and maybe beyond. We’re going to try to be as broad as possible. The second thing is, I think these AI applications, these native AI companies (take OpenAI), are going to have software development kits. I think they’re going to have SDKs and just like Apple created the app store, but Apple didn’t build every app. Very few of the most popular apps are Apple native apps. Why isn’t Apple able to make the most popular apps? Because it’s just so much for one company to do, to make hardware, to make an operating system, and to make apps.
When the iPhone came out, all the apps except YouTube were native. Now all the apps I use, other than iMessage, are not made by Apple, except for maybe the calculator because I don’t really care to download my own calculator. This is probably where the world is going, that there are going to be companies that develop devices, there are going to be companies that develop operating systems, but I don’t know if there are going to be single apps just like with the App Store because every app is going to want to have its own interface. Every app is going to want to have its own kind of culture, and so this is my theory for where it goes, but there is a maximalist view that it’s all consolidated to one or two companies.
That maximalist view is, I think, best expressed by the companies that are promising agents. OpenAI is one of them. I know you have a relationship with OpenAI. I want to talk about the work you might be doing there, but they’ve built some agents and some prototypes of agents. There are other companies that have built even jankier prototypes of agents that at the beginning were just using testing software. They weren’t even using AI. There’s stuff like Model Context Protocol that Anthropic is doing, which sort of creates API layers for agents, right?
All of that basically implies I’m going to talk to my computer and the computer’s going to go do stuff for me. The next version of Siri, which is now delayed, the promise was you would talk to Siri and it would use the apps on your phone for you. I don’t know if that’s maximalist to “one or two companies will control everything,” but it is maximalist to “there’s a platform change coming and natural language will be the interface.”
You’ll mostly communicate with your computer by talking to it, and then it’ll just do stuff. And that’s the thing that disintermediates your interface. It disintermediates your customer relationship, and I don’t know why you would participate in it. I’ve asked this of all the companies that provide services, when you watch the Alexa demo and it’s like, “I got you a sandwich,” it’s like why would any of the delivery services disintermediate their customer relationship in that way.
Well, yeah, there’s a bunch of things here. One is it’s not clear to me that voice is the best way to do everything. It’s not even clear that voice is the best way to do most things. Let’s zoom out for a second. Just like I don’t think a chatbot interface was the best interface for most tasks, hence your iPhone. You don’t want to text the weather, you don’t want to text the calculator. You want a specific interface. I think a lot of the future is going to be more visual. I think the amount of bandwidth you can communicate through verbalizing words is very, very limited compared to seeing something, and hearing is very, very low bandwidth. So it’s great for certain things, but it is very, very limited in being able to do other things. I mean, get me an Airbnb. Well, what does that Airbnb look like?
What does it feel like? It gets very limited very, very quickly. And additionally, you’re right. These companies are going to have to want to participate in the platform, and I don’t think companies just want to be data layers, and so these platforms or these new interfaces are only as good as the companies that participate, and the companies will only participate if they can have a relationship with their own customer. So we’re going to have to figure out this new world. It’s going to be, I think, really, really interesting. I think the future’s going to be multimodal. Voice will be critical to it, but I think it’s going to be much more than voice. There will be some things that will be voice only, but I think there’s going to be things that go well beyond voice, because it’s hard to receive information from an audio standpoint to do most tasks. I mean, you can get only so far with it.
I’ve asked people on both sides of that debate how they think it might be resolved. They all have a similar answer, which is, well, we have to convince everyone to participate, and then the specifics go to, well, maybe we’ll just pay them more money than they would’ve otherwise gotten, right? It’ll be worth your while to be a data layer here. We’ll just pay you a transaction fee on top of what you might otherwise get. And then other people have a version of what you’re saying, which is actually what I want you to do is just open my interface inside of the agent and then I’ll have a customer relationship, and I have no idea how any of this will play out. Have you had these conversations? Have you talked to the various agentic companies and said, “Here’s what I actually want”?
I mean, one of the things I’ve talked to numerous companies, including Sam [Altman], about is there has to be some type of software development kit, an SDK, and it would be great for us to be able to think about this together and figure out is there a win-win? That’s the big question. Is there a win-win? And there probably is. It is so early that no one really knows. This is the very beginning, but ultimately, and this is what I told Sam, the right solution will be whatever’s best for the customer. Whatever’s best for the customer will win because they’ll ultimately vote. And so you’ve got to imagine what’s going to create the best experience. But I think my instinct is you will have very few devices, you’ll have very few operating systems, but you’ll have more apps. And I think that’s kind of the way computing has always been. That’s my instinct of where it goes.
I think increasingly more of these AI companies are going to have to choose to be either the language layer, the foundational layer, and that’s where a lot of them will go, or they can vertically integrate. But if a company vertically integrates like Apple, you can’t vertically integrate and be wide because there’s too many things to do. Imagine Apple trying to build the device, the operating system, the Airbnb app, and handle customer service and do this and do that and build the community and handle all the money and deal with trust and safety. So there’s just a lot of jobs to be done in society and every company has to bring its core skill set.
One of the things I think we’re great at is interface and interface design and the connection of the online world with the offline world. And so, ultimately, the best product will win, the best solution will win. Part of what we’re trying to do is broaden our offering as much as possible, mostly for the customer and mostly not for strategic considerations because you have to align your interests with what the customer wants, but this is exactly where I think we could go.
The other thing I think about when you think about the service providers in the context of the agentic AI is I’ve seen a lot of demos where someone points a phone at a dishwasher and says, “My dishwasher is broken. Get me somebody to fix it.” And then the data provider is like a Thumbtack or an Angie’s List and it says, “I booked someone for you.”
Now, I’ve booked repair people on these services, and the problem is the individual repair people use that for discovery, but they don’t use it to actually run their back office. They’re not actually scheduling there. They would prefer you not to transact with them there because they have to pay fees. There’s a whole other side of it where you can tell the database that something happened, but the actual human being might not actually ever show up. And you’ve got to close that gap across all of the verticals that you’re now in. And one of the ways you close that gap is to just take it over and say, “We’re going to run your back office too.” Are you all the way there?
We’re going to get pretty vertically integrated so that we’re building the tools for these service providers. We’re building the tools for these hosts, and I think this maybe goes to a broader point, which is that most customers when they look at Airbnb see an app with five tabs, and they see an interface. It’s kind of similar to Amazon. When you see Amazon as a customer, all you see is the website, and then you see the cardboard box showing up. It turns out most of what we call Amazon — at least Amazon retail, not AWS — is not the website. It’s the fulfillment center. It’s everything that’s powering the website and fulfilling everything. I think the truth is that’s what’s going to be Airbnb.
You can almost think of Airbnb as three things. It’s the app that customers see, the guest app. There is this whole app the hosts use, which is probably even more robust than the guest app because that’s an app people use every day. And then there’s almost this third Airbnb, which is the biggest of all, which is the system that powers everything that makes all this possible. How do you make sure that when somebody wants to get a haircut, you have the tools to make sure that somebody can manage their business on Airbnb? But the bigger challenge is not even that. It’s how many people in New York City need to get a haircut every night, and what kind of price point do they want, and who’s vetting them and how do we make sure they show up? What happens when they don’t show up and what happens when they’re late?
There’s a thousand contingencies, and the question is how do you design a system elegantly [enough] to be able to solve all these different problems? And so there’s just going to be so much to do. And I think that’s what makes it so interesting, and one of the reasons it’s hard to fully disintermediate something like this is it’s the real world. If you think “what will AI automate?” It’s going to automate a lot of digital content. I think robotics and autonomy are going to automate a lot of repetitive tasks. I think the service and experience economy — I mean, who knows in 10 years, 20 years what isn’t automated and what isn’t done by humanoids — but certainly in the next 10 years, I think that’s a lot of where the human-centric economy goes, where people are doing physical things in the real world.
I want to ask about the decision to do this. You and I have talked about decision-making a lot in the past. We talked about founder mode, which was a great conversation. You did a big story with Steven Levy at Wired, which is great. I recommend people go read it, and it basically sounds like you decided to do this, right? You took a lot of notes, you wandered around your house, you decided you’re going to do this. You had a meeting, and you said, “We’re doing this.” That’s a big decision. Did your team push back on you? Did you just roll over them? How did that work?
No. When I say I decided to do it, I guess the better way to say it is I decided one weekend to write a vision of this that then became a multi-month conversation with the team. And so it actually happened in the wake of the OpenAI situation.
Yeah, I was looking at the timing and I was thinking, “This is all happening at the same time.”
So the OpenAI thing, like Sam was fired from OpenAI on a Friday before Thanksgiving. I was pretty involved in that situation, more as just a helpful friend. From Friday to Tuesday, my parents and my sister and her husband were in town, and then they eventually left my house for Thanksgiving weekend to go to my brother-in-law’s family’s house. I had this weekend by myself with all this pent-up energy, and that’s when I basically just poured all these ideas down.
Now, these were things I was thinking about for a long time. It was basically, what if you could Airbnb the world? What if you could have Airbnb for everything? And I basically started saying, “Well, what would everything be?” And I wrote down a list of things, services, experiences. It was really three ideas. Idea number one was Airbnb is going to become a platform where you could go from short-term rentals — vacation rentals — to kind of everything you’d need to travel and live, kind of like Amazon went from books to everything.
The second idea was Airbnb, to the point of AI, was going to become an agentic app. It was going to become the ultimate concierge for traveling and living, and we’d become the ultimate agent. By the way, if you think the future of AI is agents, what are the most common agents in the world? Travel agents, customer service agents. That’s what we do. So we know a lot about that. The third was, and maybe most importantly, we were going to go from a marketplace to a community and put people at the center. So I wrote this out. It was like thousands of thousands of words. I tried to distill it, distill it, distill it finally to these three basic ideas. I shared it with an executive team, I think on a Monday morning, and I think the team was both enthusiastic and had a lot of questions.
Basically when I communicate, and now this goes to organizational stuff, I try to communicate in concentric circles. Some founders and CEOs just do things and just tell a few people and no one knows. That’s probably the worst thing because you’re not bringing people along. Some people have an idea and they email the entire company. I think that also is problematic because you don’t want to tell somebody and their manager at the same time. Because then people go to their manager and their manager’s not bought in. They’re like, “I don’t know what we’re doing. I’m not sure.” And people aren’t really bought into it, and then everything’s half-baked.
So what I did is I brought in my executive team, which was maybe 10 or 12 people. We beaded the idea up, I refined it, refined it. Then I kind of went to the next consensus circle of 20, 30 more people, and I just kept widening the aperture. There weren’t really a lot of edits from the original vision. It was very clear that this was inevitably where Airbnb was going to go. It was going to be a community where you could travel and live anywhere. AI was going to be the center. People’s profiles were going to be at the center.
Then we just started working on it, and we were actually transforming the company before everyone’s eyes. We basically rewrote the technology stack, rewrote the app, and it was great because we had to do it anyway to update our core business. So, we basically rebuilt the entire app. It worked out insofar as it actually advanced our core business, made our core business better, made our core business stronger, but we were able to turn all of our components into primitives that were extensible. So now it wasn’t a page for a home. It was a page for anything, if that makes sense. But we put on a new technology stack, and then on the page that was an anything page, the homes performed better, because we built it in a much better way.
That’s super interesting. So you’re abstracting the core of the platform and now you can sell basically anything?
You can sell and do almost anything. And so this gets to the point, which is to say … it’s an oversimplification to say there’s going to be these broad AI companies and there’s all these companies that are narrow verticals. Well, we’re going to be an AI company too, because it would be like saying we’re an electricity company or we’re an internet company. I think there’s AI-native companies, companies that were founded on the premise of AI, but even that’s not novel anymore. I mean, it’s basically every single startup in Y Combinator, and I’m on the board of YC, I see a lot of companies. Maybe 500 or a thousand companies come through YC every year now, and every one of them is an AI company. Just like every company 10 years ago was a mobile app, but companies weren’t native.
So I think now every company’s going to be an AI company. There will be some dominant companies. There’s no question OpenAI is getting escape velocity and will be dominant, but it can’t do everything. It’s going to have to pick its lane, and then all of us are going to have access to much of the same technology. And the real question is, “Is this technology really proprietary, or is it pretty freely available?” And so far, it’s pretty freely available. The models are getting more and more ubiquitous, cheaper, more open source. I think there’s the race to super intelligence, and some of the deep research might become very proprietary, but most of what we need for day-to-day life isn’t that.
We talked once previously, you had just given a speech I think at Figma’s conference last year. You said Airbnb had gotten rid of all your PMs [product managers] and you got product marketing managers. This was a big sensation in the way that whenever you talk about how Airbnb is structured, you often cause a sensation. You’re describing some big fundamental rethinks of the app here.
Totally.
And you famously have moved the entire company onto one roadmap. How do you do this without PMs? Did you tell them all to think differently? Did you have to restructure that group at all?
Yeah, it’s actually really interesting. That quote was taken out of context. Most companies have these people called product managers. Okay, let’s back up. If we’re going to design a building, let’s just use, I think this is a really simple metaphor for everyone listening. There’s really a couple of parties to design a building. You have the designer, who is called an architect. Then you have a general contractor and builders, who are almost like engineers. And then those are the main two people making a building. And you have something in between called the program manager, making sure you’re on schedule. There’s not really a product manager of a building. That’s actually the architect. So the designer has a pretty big robust role.
At Airbnb, we really decided that we wanted the designers to have pretty robust roles, kind of like architects have for buildings, but you still need a product type person. And what we ended up doing was we took the classic product manager role. We decided to have fewer of them because the more product managers you have, the more you have product proliferation. They go in many directions. We elevated design. A lot of companies have design report to product, and product is like this mini CEO. We elevated design to be alongside product, so it’s engineering, design, and product.
We then, in some ways, made the inbound software part of product management a little smaller, but we actually added marketing to it. Not like the advertising distribution, but who is the customer? How do you get this out to them? What’s the positioning? How do we tell the story of the product? And the story of a product is really important because a lot of great ideas start with a story. Like how are you going to talk about this? What is this?
So we basically reframed the role. It’s called product marketing, but the most precise description would probably be product management / product marketing, where there’s inbound and outbound, developing the software and shipping the software and getting distribution. We made it a much narrower, leaner function. And then we built a fourth function, which was program management. And program management was a tier one function. At most companies, it’s not even a real function, or it works under the PMs, and they are the ones making sure everything stays on schedule.
So in a lot of companies the product managers keep the schedule. The product managers are held accountable by the program managers to have the schedule. And then this is really critical when you have one company and one roadmap. When you want to have everything integrated together, you need basically this really robust program management function holding everything to the schedule. You need the product marketers to be the owner of the product, but they manage by influence. They don’t have total control like [at] other companies. It’s all integrated. And then designers and engineers and product marketers are all integrated together, and the key leaders and I make the key trade-offs. This is how it works at Apple too. So it’s not a model that’s totally novel.
Put that into practice for me. I love this idea that you re-architected the core part of the database to support every kind of service instead of just houses. A lot of companies are going to say, “Well, we have a database for houses in real estate. That thing’s doing great. We’re going to stand up this other database for services.” The conceptual jump to “we should refactor the entire database to support everything in a more abstract way” is huge.
Some companies would just straight up call that tech debt. The tech debt here is we can’t do this in the house database. We’re going to build the new database and we’ll figure it out down the line. Where does that come from in your structure to actually take that jump?
This is great. So at most companies, just to put a fine point on it, you have a core business. It’s run by people who manage a business, and you want to do something else, so you divide the company up and you create a new team of separate people working on the new thing. And this is the beginning of divisionalizing the company — dividing it up, hence a divisional structure.
This is how almost every company works. And then you want another new thing, and there’s another new team, and often they’re in a different building, they’re “protected,” they’re different kinds of people. There are more early-stage people. And then the big thing is run by late-stage people. They fight for resources, they don’t collaborate together. And then when you have to run an ad campaign, like which team gets the advertising dollars, who gets the real estate on the home page, you end up having this competition for resources. You end up having a competition of budget and money. And then even the budget process is a bottoms up roll-up and you’re negotiating.
At Airbnb, everything is totally functional. So there’s no head of Experiences, there’s no head of Services, there’s no head of Homes. There’s a head of design, there’s a head of engineering, there’s a head of product marketing. Now within product marketing, there’s points like DRIs [Directly Responsible Individuals]. So functions might have people who are dedicated, but we don’t have these little pods. Does that make sense? A lot of companies have design, engineering, product manager pods, and they work together. There’s a benefit to this and a huge downside. I ultimately think it’s a downside. The benefit is you can do lots of disparate things quickly, and you can start things up because it doesn’t require coordination. This is why people divisionalize. The problem, to your point, is it creates tech debt, and then ultimately fast is slow and slow is fast.
Whatever is fast to start, often becomes slow in a big company because you hit a wall, you don’t have resources, you can’t collaborate together and you have this huge debt. And then the big thing that’s the moneymaker gets old and it has to be reinvented, but who’s going to reinvent it? And you have this new Skunk Works team trying to reinvent the core thing and replace everyone’s job, and then everyone feels threatened and it’s old versus new. So we decided to just have the entire company work on one thing together, and I basically said, “We’re not going to work on more things than we all can personally manage.” There was a huge benefit to this way of working though, which is that it’s where real innovation comes from — to have an entirely new search group, to have an entirely new product description page that’s extensible, to have a new messaging platform.
I’ll give you an example. We launched Experiences. We then relaunched it. We want to make the experiences more social, so we want you to be able to see who’s going on the experience, be able to message people, communicate afterward, share photos and videos. So we had to rebuild the entire messaging platform, and we had to rebuild the messaging from the ground up to make it almost like iMessage or WhatsApp. We could never have done that if there had been a division, because the Experiences team would’ve had to try to get the core messaging team to build all these features, but we’re already renovating the whole house. So if we’re already replacing everything in the bathroom, if we’re renovating the bathroom, we’re like, “Well, let’s just build with the spec in mind.” So basically it’s as if we’ve updated the entire company. It’s now in this brand-new standard, and now we are just going to keep updating the whole thing over and over again and go broader and broader and broader and broader and broader.
This is the theory of how Airbnb is perhaps protected in a world of AI. We get broader, we update, we don’t get calcified, and I think this is a unique way of working in a functional organization where everything is totally integrated on one single roadmap. We were functional. The entire thing is organized by program management, but it’s led by me. I’m pretty hands-on. I’m essentially the chief product officer of the company. I have a head of product marketing, but I’m in the room with them, and we’re just moving very, very quickly. I think it’s possible that the application, the new Airbnb app that we launched three days ago, was the biggest change at one time to any app of our size ever. Instagram, TikTok, Uber, DoorDash — most of these apps make incremental changes every day, but they don’t make a giant leap forward because it’s risky. But they’re not even organized to do that.
I think 80 percent of the app is basically new surface area from three days ago, and yet $90 billion is flowing through it. And so that was like changing the engine on a moving car with many people in the car at the same time. And so it’s a pretty big reinvention. There aren’t many other ways to do that. I think it’s an advantage from a speed standpoint. Maybe that’s the paradox of how I run this company, which is there’s this assumption that the way I run this company, being very hands-on, slows things down, and initially it kind of slows things down, but I think it ultimately speeds things up because it’s like we’re in one car. My pedal is to the metal, I have my hand on the steering wheel, and I can turn left and we all turn left. At large companies, there’s this view that, “Well, I am super hands-on, so now I take all the control from the employees,” but control is not a zero-sum game.
There’s a scenario where we’re all empowered, and there’s a scenario where we’re all disempowered. And at many large companies, it’s not like the employees have the power and the CEO doesn’t. It’s kind of everyone’s a little bit powerless. At least this is the bad version of the big company where there’s politics, there’s bureaucracy, and hence, why do startups exist? Startups exist because big companies don’t act like startups. This is actually the whole premise of founder mode.
Jeff Bezos once said this to me. He said, “Small companies are nimble, big companies are robust, but as companies get robust, they lose their ability to be nimble.” The best companies in the world can be robust and nimble. Steve Jobs had this saying that he wanted Apple to be the world’s biggest startup. That’s another way of saying the same thing. We want to just be the world’s biggest startup. Founder mode being totally integrated is the attempt to be the world’s biggest startup, which I think is what you’ll need in the age of AI, because you need to change and adapt. Startups are going to take over.
As somebody who’s renovated a bathroom before, that quickly gets costly. You’re like, “I’m going to renovate the whole house,” which it sounds to some extent like you did.
We kind of did that.
I saw a former Airbnb engineer say that part of the new app involved inventing a new, “cutting-edge” video player format. They did that before they left Airbnb. We’re renovating the bathroom, now we’re investing in cutting-edge video-player formats. Video players, you can get that off the shelf. How do you get to the point where it’s worth it to spend time all the way down to the bare metal of video player formats?
I mean, it’s kind of the old thing of vertical integration. Those app icons that are three-dimensional and beautiful and move and change, that technology wasn’t really available. It sounds pretty straightforward, but we were pushing the boundaries of what we could do off the shelf with a typical software developer kit. We basically tried to find a trade-off. Our North Star is we would like to do everything in as vertically integrated a way as possible to make it amazing. There are constraints of basically two things: time and resources. We can only hire so many people, and we have to hit deadlines. We have to pick the things that really matter to us. In this case, it wasn’t super resource intensive to be able to develop this new interface, but we decided ultimately that one of our core competencies was design, and that we were going to have one of the best design apps in the world, and that was a competitive advantage, and that’s why people are going to use Airbnb.
So we invested a lot on the application layer, and we designed this basically new interface language. There’s no name for it, but it’s not flat, and we’ve been living mostly in a world of flat design, and flat design I think really came out with iOS 7, where you remember when you first got an iPhone, they called it skeuomorphic, everything was dimensional, colorful, but a little bit kitschy and a little bit dark and a little bit literal, like wood grain for a bookshelf. And then we moved to flat design, which might’ve been a reasonable intermediary step. Flat was brighter, the screens weren’t as dark. It was kind of simple and it was easier to develop because three-dimensional design is more difficult. Now with AI though, there’s so many more tools, and I think with AI image generation, I think people are falling back in love with illustration.
They’re falling back in love with three-dimensional art. I think we’re starting to realize we’re spending more and more time on devices, and we want the world on the device to be as rich and vibrant and colorful as the real world. This table in front of us is a white table, but if you really look at it it’s not just one color of white. It’s not flat. It’s actually many shades of many colors. I think this is where the interface is going.
So part of what we wanted to do was set a standard for an entirely new design language, which is three-dimensional, colorful, vibrant, animated. It was alive with movement, and we thought that was going to be a competitive advantage. We’re going to have such a great interface that people are going to gravitate to us, and this is what we have to contribute in the age of AI. We can design interfaces as well as anybody in the world, and we’ve designed this new interface that we think is going to be hopefully very intuitive and very extensible to do a lot of different things.
Yeah, that same engineer ended that tweet by saying, “Hopefully they open source it soon.” Are you going to open source the video player soon?
I don’t think it needs to be proprietary, but I’ll talk to the team.
One of the reasons I ask that is because you are talking a lot about AI design, a lot of people are sharing AI-generated riffs on your icons. They’re uploading the icons to AI.
It’s so fun.
They’re making new stuff. You’re talking about design as a moat, and then there’s this machine that will just boost your design and put it everywhere and maybe reduce the power of that moat. What’s the interaction there?
Ultimately, I think the world’s going to be this push and pull where designers can do things in a handcrafted way. AI is going to be able to somewhat replicate and automate things, but they won’t get to the same level of craft as what a person can do. Again, I don’t think the future is handcrafted or AI, it’s whoever combines the two. The fact is that even before our new app, anyone could create 3D icons, but they didn’t look as good as ours. We used AI image generation for inspiration, but ultimately that level of craft still required a hand eye. Even if you use AI generation to train the Airbnb icons to create your own, you’re probably still going to want to craft them to make them really perfect, and AI will never be as good as AI plus people. That’s the key point.
People probably can’t, in the long run, beat AI, but people plus AI is probably always the most powerful combination. In other words, what is people plus AI? It’s constantly prompting an AI and that’s where design goes. I think in the future, design is less about handcrafting and it’s more about taste. It’s more about curation and designing bigger and bigger worlds. So I’m supportive of people leveraging Airbnb and using it as inspiration. I mean, listen, if our design becomes a little less of a moat because more people copy our design and that becomes the standard, that’s ultimately good for the world, and I don’t think we’re at risk. Because I think we’re going to take the next leap and the next leap and the next leap, and I think that’s just progress.
You obviously worked on this with Jony Ive. Jony Ive was at the event when you were onstage. LoveFrom, his firm, I think it has a contract with you. Jony Ive was the proponent of flat design in iOS 7. That was his project.
Yes, and he was the proponent for us to move past flat design.
What was that conversation like?
I think the way it happened was three or four years ago, we did this landing page. It was like a marketing page, and on the top of the landing page we had these 3D isometrics, like when you look at a three-quarter view and there’s no perspective. It’s hard to explain. Jony saw these 3D little worlds we had created and he loved it. And then he and his team explored based on that interface design, and he had actually created a whole library of three-dimensional icons. Not ones we ended up using but ones we used as inspiration. He also worked on a lot of the new interfaces that we drew inspiration from. What I noticed is everything was dimensional, it was colorful, it was vibrant, it had animation, it had movement. So while he was the one who probably, more singularly than anyone, popularized flat design through taking over software design at Apple with iOS 7, he was also a big inspiration.
I think we were in it together. He didn’t individually conceive it. He and I and my design team at Airbnb are all on this journey together, and we all kind of realize interface design’s going somewhere else. And maybe it’s just fashion, right? It’s almost like minimalism is fashionable and then the reaction to minimalism is maximalism, and this is just maybe I think the next wave of interface design. There may eventually be a reaction to that, and I’m not sure if that will be flat. It might be something totally different, but it’s very clear to me that this is where it’s going in the world of AI, and I think it’s going to be really exciting. So yeah, they were a very helpful source of inspiration for this.
It’s interesting. I do think we’re at a moment in design and software design where lots of people are trying new things, whatever the old thing is, is over. The other way that I see AI designs in particular is an eye toward augmented reality, and you can see some hints even in Apple’s design right now as it heads toward that future that actually everything should be overlays and have layers of transparency.
I’d like that.
You think that’s good? Because that feels very different from what you’re doing, which is much more animated, much more textural, much more colorful as opposed to we’re just going to put glass over the real world.
There’s no reason you couldn’t do both. It’s just that we only design software for phones and basically laptops, and they’re like singular worlds and bridges to the real world. So we designed these devices and the augmented reality platforms haven’t really gotten any meaningful adoption to be useful for Airbnb. The biggest idea that might govern all of this, that might basically describe where we’re going with design language, where we’re taking the company, and my vision for the future is that the real world is magical. Imagine Nilay, for a second, it’s kind of an absurd thing, but imagine the real world didn’t exist and we only lived on devices, and suddenly, a Steve Jobs–like figure stood onstage and invented the real world, and they said, “Today I’m introducing the real world.” And you’d be looking around, you’d be like, “Oh my god.”
It’s easy to forget how incredible the real world is. I think interface, design, our product, everything is going to go into the real world. Maybe another way of saying it isn’t that we’re going to all live in these digital realities. It’s that we’re going to bring those into the real world, that these things aren’t going to converge, and for the most magical place in the real world, how can we augment it and make it as special as possible? Our attempt with interface design is to essentially simulate the real world but in a simplified, curated way. It’s not as chaotic as the real world because it’s got to be much more intuitive than a cacophony of things that you see in your environment. But I think the real world’s magical. That’s why I’m focused on experiences. That’s why I’m focused on connections. That’s why I’m focused on services.
That’s why I’m focused on a design language that mimics the real world. I think bridging the online world and the offline world is going to be massive. AI has not scratched the surface of what it’s going to do for this world because it mostly has only affected the digital world and the vast majority of the data is in the physical world. Just think about the amount of inputs and things happening in this physical world, and so that’s where my interest lies — in the connection between the online world and the offline world. What is the interaction between those? To me, there’s magic there.
All right, so now I have to ask you, you’ve mentioned Sam Altman, who’s your friend, a bunch of times. We’ve talked about Jony Ive several times. He’s involved in your company. Jony Ive is also working with Altman, his company, LoveFrom, working with OpenAI on what sounds like a next-generation device. Ive has hinted at this at recent conferences. There’s reporting that you’re involved. What’s going on there? You’re thinking about a next generation post-phone device?
All I will say, because I can’t say anything, is that I’m proud to have been the one to introduce the two of them. Jony was working with me, and I thought he should know Sam, and I told Sam, “This is one of the greatest designers of our generation.” I was happy to bring them together, and I can’t wait to see what happens.
All right. I’m going to take one more shot and a spicy one to end here. You are one of the closest watchers of Apple that I know. You’ve thought a lot about the company and how it’s structured and how it works and how it grew to be its size. The last time you were on the show, I asked you what it should do next, and you said, and this is a quote: “My unsolicited advice is that whenever Tim [Cook] decides to retire, the next CEO should also be the chief product officer.
Yes.
That they need deep-product thinking at Apple. My spiciest take right now, given all the regulatory pressure on Apple, the angst from its developer community, the antitrust cases, Google’s search revenue going away, is that maybe in 36 months we don’t recognize what Apple and Google have become. Maybe they’re broken up, maybe their revenue has totally shifted. Where do you see the company is now? What moves do you think it needs to take right now?
Tim seems to have been the perfect successor for Steve, so I’m not criticizing Tim as a successor. I think he was able to take the momentum. Steve made a choice to give him the company, and he was able to take this kind of runway. Steve gave him, we call it a 15-year runway with the most successful product ever invented, and basically like, “Okay, now go here, scale this, manufacture this, make it ubiquitous, make it more efficient.” And they did that, and they were very, very successful. But ultimately, Steve’s original vision for Apple is, as he said, “Humans are tool builders and we create tools for people to change the world.” That was basically the idea.
The most important thing for Apple is it keeps creating new computing tools, and they’re ready now. Some could say Apple’s late, but in the grand scheme of history, it doesn’t really matter, maybe because Apple’s still hugely successful. It’s only truly late if it starts losing a huge amount of market share and it can’t hire and all its talent starts leaving. So I don’t think Apple’s that late, but it does need to come up with the next great tools. And I think the problem is the person if it’s not the chief product officer, as Apple’s also a functional organization. So who’s actually driving the product? Who’s actually making all the decisions? Who’s actually making sure this is a great thing in marshaling resources? In a functional organization, this is why companies have divisional structures. If you don’t have a person in charge making decisions, you end up having a bunch of peers making decisions. The reason a bunch of peers isn’t a good assembly of people to make a decision is two things happen.
Number one, peers tend to make a lot of compromised decisions. Then you never end up with the boldest, better-quality decision. The second thing is it’s really slow. Because no one can tell anyone else what to do, you have to just go on, and people are polite to one another because they have to work together, so no one can step on anyone’s toes. So you have an organization of people who are polite, who are not stepping on one another’s toes, who are thinking and speaking fairly incrementally, and that’s a good recipe for perpetuating something. It’s not a good recipe for inventing something, and so you really have two choices. Choice number one is you get a product person to run the company the way Steve did, and maybe that person doesn’t exist. Maybe they do.
Choice two is then you have to push decision-making through the org and go back to a divisional structure, but Apple prides itself on its design and integrated system, and so that is going to have its own downside. That’s how Amazon runs, where it really pushes decision-making down to single-threaded owners, and that would be really different culturally for where Apple’s going. So I think Apple’s mission is to build tools to help people change the world. It needs to come out with these new devices, it needs to come up with new tools, and it needs somebody who can spearhead that. And I keep asking who was the chief product officer when Steve was alive, and everyone said Steve was, and I asked who it is now, and they say, “Well, it’s not clear who it is.” It probably hasn’t, in the grand scheme of things, been a problem because the iPhone’s been on this 18-year run, but to do the next thing, I think Apple needs that person.
This comes to my point. About 36 months from now, the modern internet that we are all building on kind of happened because Microsoft had a bunch of regulatory problems, and companies like Google were able to succeed. Companies like Apple were able to say, “Look, the web’s a big deal. Buy an iMac instead of a Windows PC” because the open web has not been threatened by this. Okay, well, here are these giants. They’re a little shaky. They might be distracted by their own interests and troubles. Do you see opportunity there in the way that there was opportunity in the past?
Yeah. I think that there’s these two forces that are combining together. In the ’90s, you had Microsoft distracted by antitrust regulation and the fears of it becoming too powerful with the rise of the internet. The rise of new technologies tends not to consolidate power. They tend to democratize. Maybe AI is different. There’s this theory that the rich get richer because there’s so much money required for compute and it becomes a runaway train and no one ever catches it and it reaches this super intelligence escape velocity. But I don’t know. My intuition is it’s not right because that’s not how it’s ever been in history that every new platform shift is a shift to who’s in power, and it often shifts to the new startups that are native or at least have a native culture. Now, Apple is a unique example, where it was an old company from the ’70s that made the platform shift to the internet, but I think that also coincided with the return of Steve Jobs, so it had this startup-like founder mentality that was able to get there.
I think these companies are going to really need to be able to do that. I think in the age of AI, my argument is you need to be founder oriented / founder mode because you’re going to need to be able to move like a startup to be able to adapt, and I think these big, professionally managed companies aren’t organized to be able to do that, so they don’t bode well for this new world. But I really do think it’s probably less about regulation. I think regulation’s more of a distraction, but the distraction can take your eye off the ball. I think the big thing is we’re in the next wave. We probably had the first wave of modern technology, which was the personal computer. The second wave was the internet, and this is probably the third wave. Mobile was a wave, but this is more of a generalized technology wave.
I think this is going to lead to a Cambrian explosion. My intuition is there’s going to be so many companies that are so powerful rising up and all of us that are big, we’re not as big as Apple, but we’re all like cars on a highway. A lot of people are coming through the rearview mirror, and so that which is empowered today may not be empowered tomorrow. And the idea that we need to break up companies because they’re too powerful. The bigger issue is, of course, that technology is going to break them up. The technology wave is going to break them up, and so all of us have to be moving as fast as we can. And what does that have to do with? That has to do with culture. That’s why, to me, so many roads lead back to the conversation we have with org charts and founder mode, because you don’t want to miss the next wave, and that really is all about the culture and how you operate.
Brian, I can obviously talk to you about this forever. I think you’re going to have to come back a fifth time.
I know. I just love these.
This is great. Thank you so much for being on Decoder.
Thank you so much for having me.
Questions or comments about this episode? Hit us up at decoder@theverge.com. We really do read every email!
]]>Today, I’m talking with Megan Greenwell, a former top editor at Wired and Deadspin, about her new book Bad Company: Private Equity and the Death of the American Dream. It comes out on June 10th, and it’s a searing account of how private equity goes far beyond impacting failing businesses and deeply affects and transforms the lives of everyday Americans.
Decoder is very much a show about the systems and frameworks that explain tech, policy, and business, and that means we’ve talked about private equity a number of times on the show. Private equity is everywhere across the business landscape, even though its massive influence on how so many companies operate is pretty hidden from view.
But once you see it, you start to notice it everywhere, and it’s incredibly validating to hear that so many people have had similar experiences with companies managed by private equity. I know this, because it’s in our numbers and the feedback we get here on Decoder — our 2023 episode with lawyer and author Brendan Ballou about his book on private equity, Plunder, is one of our most popular episodes.
Megan’s interest in private equity came from her experience as editor-in-chief of Deadspin, the famous and now-defunct sports and culture website. Deadspin was part of Gawker, and Gawker was taken over by a private equity firm called Great Hill Partners, which began to immediately micromanage Deadspin’s content. That was when Megan first realized that the goals and financial results of a private equity firm were very disconnected from the goals and financial results of the companies it had taken over.
Listen to Decoder, a show hosted by The Verge’s Nilay Patel about big ideas — and other problems. Subscribe here!
Megan’s book is a deep dive into the private equity industry, as expressed in four parts of the economy: retail, media, housing, and — maybe the most maddening of them all — healthcare. My family has a lot of doctors in it, and I’ve heard so much about how private equity has changed healthcare in the US. You’ll hear Megan connect the dots between the financialization of healthcare and the poor experiences many people have with healthcare today.
We also spent some time talking about the history of private equity, and the throughline from the New York City real estate world that gave birth to Donald Trump all the way to the private equity industry of today. I think you’ll find there is a surprising amount of history here that really does help explain not just how the incentives of finance have come to dominate the American way of life, but also how it’s seeped into the highest levels of the government. Perhaps most surprisingly, you’ll hear Megan take great pains to differentiate private equity from venture capital, which is very different — and with very different problems.
I always really enjoy talking to other editors, especially about something they’re so curious about. Let me know what you think about this one. I suspect you will have a lot to say.
If you’d like to read more on what we talked about in this episode, check out the links below:
Questions or comments about this episode? Hit us up at decoder@theverge.com. We really do read every email!
]]>Today, I’m talking with Alphabet and Google CEO Sundar Pichai. We recorded this conversation in person after the Google I/O developer conference last week in what’s becoming a bit of a Decoder tradition. This is the third year that we’ve done Decoder after I/O, and this one felt really different. Google is in a very confident place right now, and you can really feel that in this conversation.
If you caught any of the news from I/O, you know that it was all about AI — particularly a huge new set of AI products, not just models and capabilities. Sundar told me that these products represent a new phase of the AI platform shift, and we talked about that at length: how that shift is playing out, what the markers of these phases are, and whether any of these products can actually deliver a return on the huge investments Google has made in AI over the years.
Listen to Decoder, a show hosted by The Verge’s Nilay Patel about big ideas — and other problems. Subscribe here!
This year’s I/O also marked the beginning of what appears to be a new era for search and the web. Google’s new vision for search goes well beyond links to webpages to something that feels a lot more like custom app development. When you search for something, Google’s new AI Mode will build you a custom search results page, including interactive charts and potentially other kinds of apps, in real time.
You can see that vision in the new AI Mode, which is now available to all US users. Google’s plan is to “graduate” features from AI Mode into the main search experience over time. I wanted to know how Sundar was thinking about that graduation process and how he thinks that will affect the web itself, which is shaped more than anything by the incentives of Google Search and SEO.
You’ll hear Sundar say in several different ways that the web is still getting bigger and Google is sending more traffic to more websites than ever before, but the specifics of that are hotly contested. Just before we talked, the News Media Alliance — the trade group that represents publishers like Conde Nast, The New York Times, and The Verge’s parent company Vox Media — issued what can only be described as a furious statement, calling AI Mode “theft.” So we talked about that, too, and about what happens to the web when AI tools and eventually agents do most of the browsing for us.
What does it mean for the web to go from a series of websites when AI tools just see it as a series of databases instead of as sites for people to use? Why would companies like Uber, DoorDash, or Airbnb allow their businesses to get commoditized in that way? If you’ve been listening to the show, you know I’ve been talking about this idea a lot, so Sundar and I spent some time on this idea; it was a real Decoder conversation.
Of course, we also talked about the smart glasses that Google announced at I/O and when the next era of AI hardware might arrive — including what Sundar thinks of the big OpenAI and Jony Ive deal that was announced just before we spoke. And I couldn’t let this go without asking about the major antitrust trials that Google is involved in, including the government’s demand that Google sell Chrome, and what the negotiations with the Justice Department have involved. President Donald Trump has long complained about his search results being too negative, but Sundar told me that he will not change search rankings in response to political pressure, calling search “sacrosanct.”
There’s a lot in this one — I’m eager to hear what you all think of it.
Okay: Alphabet and Google CEO Sundar Pichai. Here we go.
This interview has been lightly edited for length and clarity.
Sundar Pichai, you’re the CEO of Alphabet and Google. Welcome back to Decoder.
Nilay, good to be back. Feels like a nice tradition post-I/O to be talking to you. So good to be back.
I think this is the third year we’ve done this after I/O. I’m excited. Thank you for keeping the tradition alive. Lots to talk about. You announced a lot of things yesterday during the keynote. There’s AI mode rolling out for US users, and big updates to Gemini. There’s Veo 3 and Imagen, the generators that you solved Pokémon with, which is very exciting.
My takeaway from yesterday was that Google feels very confident now. There’s a real confidence about the technology coming to life and the products. A lot of things are shipping imminently. What’s the one piece that gave you that confidence? Is it just the volume of things that are shipping? Is it one technology that clicked into being ready for consumers? Where is it coming from?
I think it comes from the depth and breadth of the AI frontier we are pushing in a more fundamental and foundational way. We spoke a lot about this theme called research becomes reality, but it is… We’ve always felt we are a deep computer science company, and we’ve been AI-first for a while. So putting all that together and bringing it to our products at the depth and breadth is what I think is really pleasing to see. For example, people may not have noticed it much. It was so quick. We spoke about text diffusion models in the middle of the whole thing, but we are pushing the frontier on all dimensions, right? And Demis [Hassabis] spoke about world models. So I think that’s the exciting part, like how deep we are pushing this frontier and then bringing it to users, and maybe that’s what makes it feel that way.
You mentioned research into reality several times. Obviously, a lot of these projects have been cooking in the labs for a long time. You’ve said many times over the past many, many years that you and I have talked about it that you think AI will be as profound as electricity.
But you said something yesterday that I think adds to that, which is that we are in a new phase of the platform shift. People have talked about AI being a platform shift for quite a while, but that always has meant to me that there’s a user interface platform shift coming, right? We’re going to interact with computers in natural language in more natural ways, they’ll interact with us back in that same way, and everything will change. Is that the platform shift?
Yeah, you are right. Each of these platform shifts changes many things on the I/O front. Nothing to do with Google I/O, just I/O in the traditional computer science sense. You could feel it. Yesterday, when I watched the Android XR… I’ve used them and played around with them, but watching it, with two people talking in different languages, you can envision the future one day where it’ll actually be seamless. In a way, you couldn’t have done it with phones, you couldn’t have done it without AI because there’s nothing in your way. You’re looking at the other person and talking, right? And that is an element of platform shift, but there are many more elements.
This is the only platform where I think the actual platform is, over time, capable of creating, self-improving, and so on. In a way, we could have never talked about any other platform before, so that’s why I think it’s much more profound than the other platform shifts. It’ll allow people to create new things because, at each layer of the stack, there’s going to be profound improvements. And so I think that virtuous cycle you get in terms of how you can unleash this creative power to all of society, be it software engineers, be it creators — I think that is going to happen in a much more multiplicative way. So when I say it’s a next phase, I’m talking about that part too.
Let me just make that more concrete for people. I think the last platform shift we all understand is the shift to mobile.
That’s right.
And that was, we’re going to have multi-touch, we’re going to have faster cell connections, we’re going to increase processing power that can go with you everywhere. And then there was a layer of applications that was enabled by all of those things. You can push a button, and a Toyota Camry will show up wherever you are in the world. It’s like a very powerful thing that requires all of those ideas. How would you describe the phase we’re in now compared to that? The phase of this, that first phase of AI was that the transformers work and the models work, and we can all see this capability. The second phase, what is it to you?
Just imagine when the internet came, blogging became a thing. Pre-internet, very few people had a means by which they could put their thoughts out to the world. With the internet came a new medium, which allowed people to create and express themselves in a new way. With mobile came cameras, and you could shoot and you could create videos. Look at what’s happened with YouTube. For me, a similar part of this is that we are all talking about things like vibe coding. Yesterday, you saw Veo 3, so we are now in that phase. I think people are going to be able to create AI applications, you can call it, vibe coding, there are many names for it. But that power is yet to be unleashed. We are barely scratching the surface, and these models aren’t quite there. You can kind of do one-shot coding, but you really need to be a programmer to iterate and create something with polish, right? But that frontier is evolving pretty rapidly.
So I think you’re going to see a new wave of things, just like mobile did. Just like the internet did. I came to Google at the time when AJAX was the revolution, the fact that the web became dynamic. You had things like Google Maps, Flickr, and Gmail, that all suddenly came into existence. But I think AI is going to turbocharge in a way we haven’t seen before.
It feels like what you’re describing is that we’re in the phase where the products are developed, right? The capabilities were the first phase, and now we’re going to make some actual products.
And more people can build products than ever before. That’s the multiplicative part I’m talking about. Not just this platform that helps you create more products. The process of creating, developing, etc., is going to be accessible to a much wider swath of humanity than ever before.
I’m wondering, when you look at the landscape of products that exist now, most people experience AI in Gemini or ChatGPT as a chatbot. It’s a general-purpose interface to a bunch of knowledge that will talk to you. What products do you see that will have the same kind of impact as the Web 2.0 products you were talking about, besides the general-purpose chatbot?
Well, obviously, you’ve seen a wave with coding IDEs, like that entire landscape is… I can’t even keep track of how many new companies have come into it, and people are using a lot of it. And yesterday we showed a bunch of partners with whom we are working. So that’s an area where AI is making the most progress. You’re seeing the application layer, at least in terms of code editors, really come into vogue. We’ve had success with NotebookLM. We launched Flow yesterday. Flow is a new [AI video] product that allows you to create and imagine.
So those are all the applications we are doing. I think others are beginning to do it. People are working on legal assistance, and there are all kinds of startups. I was recently in a doctor’s office, and they have an AI that transcribes the whole thing, puts it all in reports, and so on. That’s an enterprise application layer. It kind of works completely differently from when I went on a visit two years ago. So all that change is happening across the board, but I think we are just in the early stages. You will see it play out over the next three to five years in a big way.
Did you ask your doctor what model their transcription software is running on?
[Laughs] No, I didn’t. No, I didn’t.
One of the reasons I’m asking this, and I’m pushing on this, is that the huge investment in the capability from Google and others has to pay off in some products that return on that investment. NotebookLM is great. I don’t think it’s going to fully return on Google’s data center investment, let alone the investment in pure AI research. Do you see a product that can return on that investment at scale?
Do you think in 2004 if you had looked at Gmail, which was a 20% project, which people were internally using as an email service, how would we be able to think about Gmail as what led us to do workspace, or get into the enterprise? I made a big bet on Google Cloud, which is tens of billions of dollars in revenue today. And so my point is that things build out over time. Think about the journey we have been on with Waymo. I think one of the mistakes people often make in a period of rapid innovation is thinking about the next big business versus looking at the underlying innovation and saying, “Can you build something and put out something which people love and use?” And out of which you do the next thing, and create value out of it.
So when I look at it, AI is such a horizontal piece of technology across our entire business. It’s why it impacts not just Google search, but YouTube, Cloud, and all of Android. You saw XR, etc., Google Play, things like Waymo, and Isomorphic Labs, which is based on AlphaFold. So I’ve never seen one piece of technology that can impact and help us create so many businesses. AI is going to be so useful as an assistant. I think that people will be willing to pay for it, too. We are introducing subscription plans, and so there’s a lot of headroom ahead, I think. And obviously, that’s why we are investing, because we see that opportunity. Some of it will take time, and it may not always be immediately obvious.
I gave the Waymo example. The sentiment on Waymo was quite negative three years ago. But actually, as a company, we increased our investment in Waymo at that time, right? Because you’re betting on the underlying technology and you’re seeing the progress of where it’s going. But these are good questions. In some ways, if you don’t realize the opportunities, that may constrain the pace of investment in this area, but I’m optimistic we’ll be able to unlock new opportunities.
One reason I wanted to start here as the foundation of the conversation is that you showed off Android XR yesterday. You showed off some prototype glasses, and you have some partners making glasses. A lot of people think augmented reality glasses powered by AI will be the realization of the full platform shift, right?
You will have an always-on assistant that can look at the world around you. You showed some of those demos yesterday. The form factor will change, and the interface will change. This will be marketed as big as smartphones were. How close do you think we are to that as a mainstream product?
It was a nice reflective moment all the way back from Google Glass. Wearing the product, I think there’s a difference between goggles and glasses. Everyone at The Verge understands as well, but obviously, we are also shipping goggles. We have announced products with Samsung to come later this year.
On the XR side, I’m excited about our partnership with Gentle Monster and Warby Parker. We’ll have products in the hands of developers this year, but I think those products will be pretty close to what people eventually see as final products. I’m excited. I think the pace is actually pretty palpable. I’d be shocked if you and I were sitting next year and I wasn’t wearing one of those when I’m doing this.
Do you think that will be a mainstream iPhone-level replacement product? Because there’s a lot of hardware that needs to be developed along the way to pull that off.
You’re wearing something on your face. I have a prescription. The bar is higher in terms of making the experience seamless enough that you’re willing to wear it on your face and enjoy it for all. I don’t necessarily think next year it will be as mainstream as what you’re talking about, but would millions of people be trying it? I think so, yeah. Both are true.
I have to ask you… Just before we sat down, OpenAI announced that Jony Ive was selling a company he had started called “io,” and Ive and his design consultants in Lovefrom would take overall design. They didn’t announce a product, but they said it’s the future of computing and it’s coming next year. Do you anticipate more of that competition, that your competitors who don’t have a smartphone operating system will go even harder in this direction?
I’m looking forward to an OpenAI announcement ahead of Google I/O, the night before. First of all, look, stepping back, I mean Jony Ive is one of a kind. You look at his track record over the years, I’ve met him only once or twice, but I’ve admired his work, obviously like so many of us. I think it’s exciting. This is why I feel like there’s so much innovation ahead, and I think people tend to underestimate this moment. In some ways, I always like to point out that when the internet happened, Google didn’t even exist.
I think AI is going to be bigger than the internet. There are going to be companies, products, and categories created that we aren’t aware of today. I think the future looks exciting. I think there’s a lot of opportunity to innovate around hardware form factors at this moment with this platform shift. I’m looking forward to seeing what they do. We are going to be doing a lot as well. I think it’s an exciting time to be a consumer, it’s an exciting time to be a developer. I’m looking forward to it.
Ive, in that video, described the phone and the laptop as legacy platforms, which is very interesting considering his own history. Are you all the way there that the phone and the laptop are legacy platforms?
I think these things, if anything, I’ve found through this AI moment that I’m using the web a lot more, because it’s easier to create a Veo 3 video in my browser on a big screen, right? And so I think the way I’ve internalized this, computing will be available, and you don’t have to make these hard choices. Computing will become so essential to you. You’re going to have it in multiple ways around you when you need it, right? I use a phone, a tablet, a laptop, and I have my workstation. And so I have the breadth of it, but over time… It makes sense to me that at some point in the future, consuming content by pulling out this black glass display rectangle in front of you and looking at it is not the most intuitive way to do it, but I think it’s going to take some time.
I feel like we could do a full hour just on Android tablets and where they could go. We’re going to come back for that. A big part of what you’re describing implicates search in really big ways, right? We’re going to be surrounded by information search, Gemini, or some future Google product. We’ll organize that information, take action for you across the web in some way, and you will have a companion. Maybe you only pull out your tablet to watch a video or something. A lot of what’s going on with search has downstream effects on the web, and downstream effects on information providers broadly. Last year, we spent a lot of time talking about those effects. Are you seeing that play out the way that you thought it would?
It depends. I think people are consuming a lot more information, and the web is one specific format. We should talk about the web, but zooming back out, there are new platforms like YouTube and others. I think people are just consuming a lot more information, right? It feels like an expansionary moment.
I think there are more creators, and people are putting out more content. And so people are generally doing a lot more. Maybe people have a little extra time on their hands, and so it’s a combination of all that. On the web, look, things that have been interesting and… We’ve had these conversations for a while. Obviously, in 2015, there was this famous meme, “The web is dead.” I always have it somewhere around, and I look at it once in a while. Predictions… It has existed for a while. I think the web is evolving pretty profoundly. I think that is true. When we crawl and look at the number of web pages available to us, that number has gone up by 45% in the last two years alone, right? That’s a staggering thing to think of.
Can you detect if that volume increase is because more pages are generated by AI or not? This is the thing I may be worried about the most, right?
It’s a good question. We generally have many techniques in search to try and understand the quality of a page, including whether it was machine-generated, etc. That doesn’t explain the trend we are seeing.
Generally, there are more web pages, right? At an underlying level, I think that’s an interesting phenomenon. I think everybody as a creator like you are at The Verge, has to do everything in a cross-platform, cross-format way. I look at the quality of video content you put out, it’s very sophisticated and very different from how The Verge used to be, maybe five to 10 years ago, right? It has profoundly changed. I think things are becoming more dynamic, and cross-format. I think another thing people are underestimating with AI is that AI will make it zero friction to move from one format to another, right? Because our models are natively multimodal. We tease people’s imagination with audio overviews in NotebookLM, right? The fact that you can throw a bunch of documents at it, you have a podcast, and you can join and learn from it.
I think this notion, the static moment of producing content by format, whereas… I think machines can help translate it. It’s almost like different languages and they can go seamlessly between. I think it’s one of the incredible opportunities to be unlocked right ahead. But maybe, I didn’t want to drift from the question we were having. Look, I think people are producing a lot of content, and I see consumers consuming a lot of content. And we see it in our products; others are seeing it too. That’s how I would probably answer at the highest level.
The way I see it currently is that the web is at an all-time high as an application platform, right? The fact that Figma exists and is as successful as it is, and its primary interface as a web app is, I think, remarkable. A lot of the products you are talking about are expressed as web apps. Even some of the most interesting search results you showed yesterday are how Google would generate a custom web app for you and display it in a search result to do some data visualization. I think that’s all looking incredible.
I think the web as a transaction platform is reaching new highs, especially with rulings that mean smartphone makers have to let people push transactions to the web. There’s something very interesting happening there. As a media platform, it feels like it’s at an all-time low, right?
Do you mean the web as a media platform?
The web as a media platform, as an information platform. If I were starting The Verge today with 11 of my co-founders and friends, we would start a TikTok channel, and we might start a YouTube channel. We would definitely not start a website with the dependencies we have as a website today. And that’s the dynamic that it feels like AI is pushing on even harder.
I’m not fully sure I agree, right? I think if you were to go and restart The Verge again, I bet you would have an extraordinary web presence.
At best, no, I’ve thought about this a lot. I think at best our web presence would look like a Substack or a Ghost or something, right?
Maybe. I’m not fully sold on that, but you know the space. I acknowledge that you know that space better than I do. I don’t have that intuition, which you do here. But look, in fact, you say the web application platform is at an all-time high, but I’ve looked. I was vibe coding with Replit a few weeks ago. The power of what you’re going to be able to create on the web — we haven’t given that power to developers in 25 years.
That is going to come ahead. It’s not exactly clear to me. Maybe today you’re looking at it and say, I wouldn’t put all the investment in because it looks like a lot of investment to do that. But that may not be true two years out, right? If you feel like you would create a TikTok channel, then maybe with 2% extra effort you could have a robust web presence. Why wouldn’t you, right? And so I’m not fully sold on it, but I think it’s a good question to ask. But you have to somehow reconcile that with the fact that overall, web traffic seems to be growing. We see more web pages. Somewhere, we have to explain all of that, too.
The publishers, as they often do, responded to Google I/O announcements. So, the News Media Alliance, after AI mode was announced yesterday, I would say they’re very upset. Here’s a statement from the President of the News Media Alliance, “Links for the last redeeming quality of search that gave publishers traffic and revenue. Now, Google takes content by force and uses it with no return, no economic return. That’s the definition of theft.” And they go on to say the DOJ and lawsuits must address it. That’s pretty furious. That’s not a negotiation, right? That’s a “We just want this to stop.” How do you respond to that very loud set of people who say, “Yeah, okay, maybe it’s growing somewhere, but for us, it’s crushing our businesses.”
First of all, through all the products, AI mode is going to have sources. And we are very committed as a direction, as a product direction to make… I think part of why people come to Google is to experience that breadth of the web and go in the direction they want to, right? So I view us as giving more context. Yes, there are certain questions that may get answers, but overall… And that’s the pattern we see today, right? And, if anything over the last year, it’s clear to us that the breadth of area we are sending people to is increasing. And so I expect that to be true with AI mode as well.
But if it was increasing, wouldn’t they be less angry with you?
You’re always going to have areas where people are robustly debating value exchanges, etc., like app developers and platforms. That’s not on the web, etc. There’s always going to be — when you’re running a platform — these debates. I would challenge, I think more than any other company, we prioritize sending traffic to the web. No one sends traffic to the web in the way we do. I look at other companies, newer emerging companies, where they openly talk about it as something they’re not going to do. We are the only ones who make it a high priority, agonize, and so on. We’ll engage, and we’ve always engaged.
There are going to be debates through it all, but we are committed to, I’ve said this before, everything we do across all… You will see us five years from now sending a lot of traffic out to the web. I think that’s the product direction we are committed to. I think it’s what users look for when they come to Google, and the nature of it will evolve. But I am confident that that’s the direction we’ll continue taking.
Is there public data that shows that AI overviews and AI mode actually send more traffic out than the previous search engine results page?
The way we look at it is… I mean, obviously, we take a lot of… We are definitely sending traffic to a wider range of sources and publishers. And because just like we’ve done over 25 years, we’ve been through the same with featured snippets, the quality of… It’s higher-quality referral traffic, too. And we can observe it because the time that people spend is one metric. And there are other ways by which we measure the quality of our outbound traffic, and it’s also increasing. And overall, through this transition, I think AI is also growing, and the growth compounds over time. So whenever we have worked through these transitions, it ends up posted. That’s how Google has worked for 25 years, and we end up sending more traffic over time. So that’s how I would expect all this to play out.
So why do you think that there is so much general economic turmoil on that side of the house? If you’re sending more traffic and the goal over time is to make sure that that works… We’re a year into it, and it doesn’t seem to have gotten better over there.
No, look, we are sending traffic to a broader source of people. People may be surfacing more content, looking at more content, so someone may individually see less. There are all kinds of… At the end of the day, we are reflecting what users want. If you do the wrong thing, users won’t use our product and go somewhere else. And so you have all these dynamics underway, and I think we have genuinely… We took a long time designing AI overviews, and we are constantly iterating in a way that we prioritize this, sources, and sending traffic to the web.
I mean, my criticism of this industry, just to be clear, is that everyone’s addicted to Google, and it would be better if they weren’t. But they’re addicted to Google, right? And they’re feeling it. And then on top of that, you see… You’ve mentioned several times that overall queries are increasing on Google surfaces, but they’re changing. They’re getting longer, they’re getting more complicated. AI mode might walk you through several steps. Maybe some people are searching on TikTok now.
Eddy Cue on the stand in the trial the other day said that search in Safari for the last month dropped for the first time in 22 years. That’s a big stat. Obviously, your stock price was affected by it. There was a statement. Is that trend bearing out that the standard Google search is dropping from devices, and different kinds of searches are increasing?
No. We’ve been very clear. We’re seeing overall query growth in search.
But have you actually seen the drop in Safari?
We have a comprehensive view of how we look at data across the board. There can be a lot of noise in search data, but everything we see tells us that we are seeing query growth, including across Apple’s devices and platforms. Specifically, I think we quantified the query growth from AI overviews. And what’s healthy is that the query growth is continuing to grow over time.
So to step back, and this is what I’ve said before, it feels very far from a zero-sum game to me. I said this last year. I think people are… It’s interesting we spoke about TikTok, right? Think about how profound of a new product TikTok was. How has YouTube done since TikTok has come, right? You could ask all these questions there. Why is it that TikTok arrives and YouTube has grown? And so I think what we always underestimate in these moments is that people are engaging more, doing more with it. We are improving our products. And so that’s how I would think about these moments.
Let me just broaden that out to agents. I watched Demis Hassabis yesterday. He was on stage with Sergey Brin and Alex Kantrowitz asked him, “What does the web look like in 10 years?” And Demis said, “I don’t know that an agent-first web looks anything like the web that we have today. I don’t know that we have to render web pages for agents the way that we have to see them.”
That kind of implies that the web will turn into a series of databases for various agents to go and ask questions to, and then return those answers. And I’ve been thinking about this in the context of services like Uber, DoorDash, and Airbnb. Why would they want to participate in that and be abstracted away for agents to use the services they’ve spent a lot of time and money building?
Two things, though. First, there’s a lot to unpack, a fascinating topic. The web is a series of databases, etc. We build a UI on top of it for all of us to conceive.
This is exactly what I wanted, “the web is a series of databases.”
It is. But I think I listened to the Demis and Sergey conversation yesterday. I enjoyed it. I think he’s saying for an agent-first web, for a web that is interacting with agents, you would think about how to make that process more efficient. Today, you’re running a restaurant, people are coming, dining and eating, and people are ordering takeout and delivery. Obviously, for you to service the takeout, you would think about it differently than all the tables, the clothing, and the furniture. But both are important to you.
You could be a restaurant that decides not to participate in the takeout business. I’m only going to focus on the dining experience. You’re going to have some people that are vice versa. I’m going to say, I’m going to go all in on this and run a different experience. So, to your question on agents… I think of agents as a new powerful format. I do think it’ll happen in enterprises faster than in consumer. In the context of an enterprise, you have a CIO who’s able to go and say, “I really don’t know why these two things don’t talk to each other. I am not going to buy more of this unless you interoperate with this.” I think it’s part of why you see, on the enterprise side, a lot more agentic experiences. On the consumer side, I think what you’re saying is a good point. People have to think about and say, “What is the value for me to participate in this world?” And it could come in many ways. It could be because I participated in it, and overall, my business grows.
Some people may feel that it’s disintermediating, and doesn’t make sense. I think all of that can happen, but users may work with their feet. You may find some people are supporting the agent experience, and your life is better because of it. And so you’re going to have all these dynamics, and I think they’re going to try and find an equilibrium somewhere. That’s how everything evolves.
I mean, I think the idea that the web is a series of databases and we change the interface… First of all, this is the most Decoder conversation that we’ve ever had. I’m very happy with it. But I had Dara [Khosrowshahi] from Uber on the show. I asked him this question from his perspective, and his answer attracts yours broadly. He said, first, we’ll do it because it’s cool and we’ll see if there’s value there. And if there is, he’s going to charge a big fee for the agent to come and use Uber.
Because losing the customer for him, or losing the ability to upsell or sell a subscription, none of that is great. The same is true for Airbnb. I keep calling it the DoorDash problem. DoorDash should not be a dumb pipe for sandwiches. They’re actually trying to run a business, and they want the customer relationship. And so if the agents are going across the web and they’re looking at all these databases and saying, okay, this is where I get food from, and this is where I get cars from, and this is where I book… I think the demo was booking a vacation home in Spanish, and I’m going to connect you to that travel agent.
Is it just going to be tolls that everyone pays to let the agents work? The CIO gets to just spend money to solve the problem. He says, “I want this capability from you. I’m just going to pay you to do it.” The market, the consumer market, doesn’t have that capability, right?
Well, look, all kinds of models may emerge, right? I can literally envision 20 different ways this could work. Consumers could pay a subscription for agents, and the agents could revenue share back. So that is the CIO-like use case you are talking about, that’s possible. We can’t rule that out. I don’t think we should underestimate… People may actually see more value in participating in it. I think this is… It’s tough to predict, but I do think that over time, if you’re removing friction and improving user experience, it’s tough to bet against those in the long run. And so I think if you are lowering friction for it and then people are enjoying using it, somebody’s going to want to participate in it and grow their business. And would brands want to be in retailers? Why don’t they sell directly today? Why won’t they do that?
Because retailers provide value in the middle. And why do merchants take credit cards? Why… I’m just saying. So there are many parts, and you find equilibrium because merchants take credit cards so they see more business as part of taking credit cards than not, which justifies the increased cost of taking credit cards. It may not be the perfect analogy, but I think there are all these kinds of effects going around, and so… But what you’re saying is true. Some of this will slow progress in agents just because we all are excited about Agent2Agent (A2A) and Model Context Protocol (MCP)… And we think no, some of it will slow progress, but I think it’ll be very dynamic. Yeah.
Yeah. There are other pressures on Google. There are antitrust pressures. The government would like you to sell Chrome. Can you do all the things you want to do if you’re made to sell Chrome?
I don’t want to comment on… We are in a legal process. I look at having been directly involved in building Chrome. I look at… I think there are very few companies that would’ve… We not only improved our product, but we also improved the state of the web by building Chrome. We open-sourced it. We provided Chromium. Everyone else has access to the browser. So I think the amount of R&D, the amount of innovation we put into it, the investments in security, etc., we do, so I think we-
But if you’re made to sell it, can you do all the things that you want to do?
I don’t think that’s the scenario we’re looking at, but stepping back… Look, I think as a company, we think of ourselves as a deeply foundational technology company, which then translates into products that touch billions of people. So we do it across many, many things. And so, of course, I think, look, as a company, we’re going to continue investing and doing our best to innovate and build a successful business in all scenarios. So this is how I would answer it.
The Trump administration is extremely transactional, I would say. The tech industry has a new relationship with Trump in his second term. You were at the inauguration. Have you had conversations about what a settlement might look like and what the Trump administration might demand to make these problems go away?
We’ve engaged with the DOJ, like we did over the years, in the context of all the cases we have. So that’s how we normally do these conversations.
Trump has very publicly said he doesn’t like his search ranking, and he wants it changed in some way. Would you ever adjust the search ranking for Donald Trump?
No. Look, we have a… I can’t… Today, the way Google Search works is that I cannot… No person at Google can influence the ranking algorithm.
AI mode is different, right? We’ve seen system prompts adjusted in very chaotic ways from some of your competitors. Is that something that you would be open to in a world where you’re serving the full answer? Would you adjust the AI mode responses in response to political pressure?
No.
Because we’ve certainly seen in Grok and others, the system prompts change the answers in dramatic ways.
The way we do ranking is sacrosanct to us. We’ve done it for over 25 years. We make a lot of… There are a lot of ranking signals we take into account and stuff. And if there’s broad feedback from people that something isn’t working, we will look at it systematically and try and make changes, but we don’t look at individual cases and change the rankings.
When you think about those sources of information, one of the things that I have been thinking about a lot is, I don’t know, how the CDC web pages have changed a lot recently. Diversity, equity, and inclusion language has been removed from pages across the government. Those used to be very high-ranking sources in Google Search. We just implicitly trusted the CDC’s web pages in some ways. Are you re-evaluating that? How there might be misinformation on some of these pages that then gets synthesized into AI results?
Oh, it’s a misunderstanding of how search works. We don’t individually evaluate the authoritativeness of a page right then. It’s what our signals do. Obviously, our signals are multiple orders of magnitude more complicated than PageRank today. But to use PageRank as an example, we weren’t the ones determining how authoritative a page is. It’s how other pages were linking to it, like an academic citation, etc. So we are not making those decisions today. And so I don’t see that changing.
As you synthesize more of the answers, do you think you’re going to have to take more responsibility for the results?
We are giving context around it, but we’re still anchoring it in the sources we find. But we’ve always felt a high bar at Google. I mean, last year when we launched AI Overviews, I think people were adversarially querying to find errors, and the error rate was one in 7 million for adversarial queries, and so… But that’s the bar we’ve always operated at as a company. And so I think to me, nothing has changed. Google operates at a very high bar. That’s the bar we strive to meet, and our search page results are there for everyone to see. With that comes natural accountability, and we have to constantly earn people’s trust. So that’s how I would approach it.
What do you think the marker is for the next phase of the platform shift after this one? We opened by talking about how we’re in a second phase. What’s the marker for the final phase, or the third phase?
Of the platform shift, do you mean?
Yeah.
Of the AI platform?
What are you looking for as the next marker?
I think the real thing about AI, which I think is why I’ve always called it more profound, is self-improving technology. Having watched AlphaGo start from scratch, not knowing how to play Go, and within a couple of hours or four hours, be better than top-level human players, and in eight hours, no human can ever aspire to play against it. And that’s the essence of the technology, obviously in a deep way.
I think there’s so much ahead on the opportunity side. I’m blown away by the ability to discover new drugs, completely change how we treat diseases like cancer over time, etc. The opportunity is there. The creative power, which I talked about, which we’re putting in everyone’s hands, the next generation of kids, everyone can program and will… If you think of something, you can create it. I don’t think we have comprehended what that means, but that’s going to be true. The part where the next phase of the shift is going to be really meaningful is when this translates into the physical world through robotics.
So that aha moment of robotics, I think, when it happens, that’s going to be the next big thing we will all grapple with. Today they’re all online and you’re doing things with it, but on one hand… Today, I think of Waymo as a robot. So we are running around driving a robot, but I’m talking about a more general-purpose robot. And when AI creates that magical moment with robotics, I think that’ll be a big platform shift as well.
Yeah. I’m looking forward to it. Next year we’re going to do this with glasses and robots. It’s going to be great.
[Laughs] We’ll give it a shot.
Thank you so much, Sundar.
All right. Thanks, Nilay. I appreciate it.
Questions or comments about this episode? Hit us up at decoder@theverge.com. We really do read every email!
]]>